Elite engineering services

API 510 Exam

API 510 EXAMS

Bassam Abdelazeem +966538391734

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

 API 510 Pressure Vessel Inspector Certification
Preparatory QUIZ CODE for API 510
Exams 2017
1. Above what pressure is a vessel considered to be in the scope of the ASME
VIII Div.1/ API-510 Code?
A) 15 psig (103.4 KPa).
B) 20 psi (138 KPa).
C) 30 psig (207 KPa).
D) 75 psig (517 KPa).
Answer: A……...ASME VIII, Pressure Vessel Scope [U-1 a (2)]
=========================================================
2. On a pressure vessel with a nozzle welded to external piping, where does
the scope of ASME Section VIII terminate?
A) The face of the low-pressure side of the first block valve
B) The first circumferential weld past the first elbow in the pipe
C) Eight inches from the shell of the vessel
D) The first circumferential joint for welded connections
Answer: B……...ASME VIII , Pressure Vessel Limitations [U-1(e)(1)(a)]
=========================================================
3. Which of the following classes of vessels are not included in the scope of
ASME Sec. VIII Div. 1?
A) a vessel for containing water with a design pressure of 330 psi
B) a vessel for containing water with a design temperature of 200°F
C) vessels having an internal pressure of 20 psi
D) vessels with an inside diameter 12 in.
Answer: B……...ASME VIII , Pressure Vessel Limitations [U-1(c)(f)(2)]
=========================================================
4. What can be done when ASME Sec. VIII Div. 1 does not contain rules to
cover all of the pressure vessel design and construction details?
A) the Manufacturer, subject to the acceptance of the Inspector, shall provide
details of design and construction which will be as safe as those provided
by the rules of ASME Sec. VIII Div.1
B) the Manufacturer shall provide details of design and construction
C) the design engineer shall provide details for the safe design and
construction as required for the intended application
D) the design engineer shall select another code that the design falls within or
the design cannot be built vessels with an inside diameter 12 in.
Answer: A……...ASME VIII , Pressure Vessel Limitations [U-2(g)]

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

5. Label these weld joints by Category A,B, C or D?

Answer: ……...ASME VIII , UW-3 Welded Joint Category [UW-3]

=========================================================
6. The repair of a pressure vessel involves replacement of a seamless
ellipsoidal head. What is the joint category of the head to shell weld?
A) A
B) B
C) C
D) D
Answer: B……...ASME VIII , Welded Joint Category [UW-3(a)(2) & Figure UW-
3]
=========================================================
7. What is the correct category for longitudinal and spiral welded joints
within the main shell of a pressure vessel?
A) Category A
B) Category B
C) Category C
D) Category D
Answer: A……...ASME VIII , Welded Joint Category [UW-3]
=========================================================
8. The category of a joint depends on:
A) What kind of weld was made, fillet or butt.
B) The process used to make the weld.
C) Whether it is vertical or horizontal in the vessel
D) None of the above
Answer: D……...ASME VIII , UW-3 Welded Joint Category [UW-3]
=========================================================
9. A circumferential weld to attach a flange is what Category?
A) D
B) C

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

C) E
D) A
Answer: B……...ASME VIII , UW-3 Welded Joint Category [UW-3]
=========================================================
10. A circumferential weld used to attach a seamless head is of what Category?
A) B
B) C
C) E
C) A
Answer: B……...ASME VIII , UW-3 Welded Joint Category [UW-3]
=========================================================
11. Which of the following is a Category D welded joint in a pressure vessel?
A) welded joint connecting a flange to main shell
B) longitudinal joint within the main shell
C) circumferential joint within the main shell
D) welded joint connecting a nozzle to main shelled.
Answer: D……...ASME VIII , UW-3 Welded Joint Category [UW-3]
=========================================================
12. What examination is required when pressure vessels are to contain lethal
substances, either liquid or gaseous, for all ERW pipe or tube to be used as
a shell or nozzle?
A) full RT
B) full UT
C) full RT and MT
D) ERW pipe or tube is not permitted in lethal service applications
Answer: D……...ASME VIII , Service Restrictions [UW-2(a)]
=========================================================
13. What is the maximum thickness at welded joints for carbon (P-No. 1) steels
that post weld heat treatment is not required for pressure vessels that are
subject to direct firing?
A) 1/2 in. (13 mm)
B) 5/8 in. (16 mm)
C) 3/4 in. (19 mm)
D) all thicknesses
Answer: B……...ASME VIII , Service Restrictions [UW-2(d)(2)]
=========================================================
14. Which of the following weld joints is not permitted for use in pressure
vessels that are subject to direct firing?
a) Category A Type No. (1)
b) Category B, > 5/8 in. (16 mm) Type No. (1)
c) Category B, > 5/8 in. (16 mm) Type No. (2)
d) Category A or B Type No. (3)

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

Answer: D……...ASME VIII , Service Restrictions [UW-2(d)(1)]
=========================================================
15. What is the minimum thickness at welded joints for low alloy steels that
post weld heat treatment is required for pressure vessels that are subject to
direct firing?
A) 1/2 in. (13 mm)
B) 5/8 in. (16 mm)
C) 3/4 in. (19 mm)
D) all thicknesses
Answer: D……...ASME VIII , Service Restrictions [UW-2(d)(2)]
=========================================================
16. Which of the following welded joints shall be examined radio graphically
for their full length?
A) all butt welds in the shell and heads of vessels used to contain lethal
substances
B) all butt welds in the shell and heads of vessels used to contain liquids with
a pH < 3.5
C) all butt welds in the shell and heads of vessels used to contain liquids with
a pH > 10.5
D) all butt welds in the shell and heads of vessels used to contain liquids with
3.5 < pH >10.5
Answer: A……...ASME VIII , Radiographic [UW-11(a)(1)]
=========================================================
17. When may ultrasonic examination be substituted for radiography if the
construction of the vessel does not permit interpretable radiographs in
accordance with Code requirements?
A) for Category A welds only
B) for Category A and B, Type (1) or (2) welds only
C) for the final closure seam of a pressure vessel
D) when suitable radiographic equipment is not available
Answer: C……...ASME VIII , Radiographic [UW-11(a)(8)]
=========================================================
18. In which of the following circumstances is radiographic examination of
welded joints not required?
A) when all of the pressure vessel welded joints have an E = 1.0
B) when a pressure vessel is designed for external pressure only
C) when the pressure vessel is designed for hot condensate service below 40
psi (300 kPa)
D) when the pressure vessel is designed for potable water service below 70 psi
(500 kPa)
Answer: B……...ASME VIII , Radiographic [UW-11(c)]

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

19. Which of the following welded joints shall be examined radio graphically
for their full length?
A) Category B butt weld in a NPS 8 nozzles
B) Category C butt weld with a 1 in. (25 mm) wall thickness
C) all butt welds in vessels in which the nominal thickness at the welded joint
exceeds 1-1/2 in. (38 mm)
D) all of the above
Answer: C……...ASME VIII , Radiographic [UW-11 (a)(1)]
=========================================================
20. Which of the following may not require full RT?
A) Some butt welds in the shell of vessels containing lethal substances
B) Some butt welds in the head of vessels containing lethal substances
C) Butt welds in the shell of unfired steam boilers with pressures > 50 psi
D) Category B or C butt welds in a non-lethal vessel
Answer: D……...ASME VIII , Radiographic [UW-11 (a)(1)]
=========================================================
21. ‘Full RT’ under ASME VIII means a vessel must have:
A) Radiography applied to all welds including fillets
B) 100 % of its welds radiographed
C) All of the welds required by code to be radiographed for their full length
D) All welds exceeding NPS 10 or 11 8 in (29 mm) radiographed
Answer: C……...ASME VIII , Radiographic [UW-11 (a)(1)]
=========================================================
22. A vessel is manufactured from P4 Group 2 material. It has a shell
thickness of 18 mm and is used to contain lethal substances. What RT is
required for a shell-to-shell circumferential butt weld?
A) Spot RT
B) No RT
C) Full RT
D) Any of the above can be used
Answer: C……...ASME VIII , Radiographic [UW-11 (a)(1)]
=========================================================
23. A vessel is manufactured from P1 Group 2 material. It has a shell thickness
of 3/4 in (19 mm) and does not contain a lethal substance. What RT is
required for a shell longitudinal butt weld?
A) Spot RT
B) No RT
C) Full RT
D) Any of the above can be used
Answer: A……...ASME VIII , Radiographic [UW-11 (a)(1)]

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

24. A 2 in (50 mm) thick P1 Group 1 material is welded using the Electro gas
welding process to give a full-penetration groove weld in a vessel in non-
lethal service. What are the NDE requirements?
A) It must have full RT and then UT after PWHT
B) It must have full or spot RT
C) It must have spot RT and then UT after PWHT
D) Either (a) or (c) is acceptable
Answer: A……...ASME VIII , Radiographic [UW-11 (a)(1)]
=========================================================
25. During the rapier of pressure vessel, a seamless ellipsoidal head is
replaced . The nameplate stamped RT-2. The replacement head attached
using a single -welded but joint with a backing strip that will be left in
place. One weld preforms the weld. What is the joint type head to shell
weld?
A) 1
B) 2
C) 3
D) 4
Answer: B……...ASME VIII , Joint Efficiencies [Table UW-12 ]
=========================================================
26. What is the maximum allowable joint efficiency if RT-4 for weld metal
type 2 not received radiographic examination ?
A) 0.65
B) 0.70
C) 0.85
D) 1.00
Answer: A……...ASME VIII , Joint Efficiencies [Table UW-12 ]
=========================================================
27. What is the maximum allowable joint efficiency for a Category A Type No.
(1) joint with visual examination?
A) 0.60
B) 0.70
C) 0.85
D) 1.00
Answer: B……...ASME VIII , Joint Efficiencies [Table UW-12 ]
=========================================================
28. What is the maximum allowable joint efficiency for a Category D Type No.
(2) joint with spot radiographic examination?
A) 0.60
B) 0.70
C) 0.80
D) 1.00

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

Answer: C……...ASME VIII , Joint Efficiencies [Table UW-12 ]
=========================================================
29. Except as required by UW-11(a)(5), how is the weld joint efficiency
determined?
A) depends on the type of joint
B) depends on the degree of examination of the joint
C) does not depend on the degree of examination of any other joint
D) all of the above
Answer: D……...ASME VIII , Joint Efficiencies [Table UW-12 ]
=========================================================
30. How shall satisfactory evidence of compliance with Article 2 of Section V
be attained to ensure radiographic image requirements of the pressure
vessel manufacturing welding was met?
A) by a written radiographic examination procedure
B) by demonstration of density and penetrometer image
C) by a qualified radiographic examination procedure
D) any one of the above
Answer: B……...ASME VIII , Full RT OF WELDED JOINTS [UW-51(a)(2)]
=========================================================
31. According to ASME Section VIII, Division 1, how long must radiographs
taken during fabrication and assembly of a pressure vessel be retained?
A) For five years
B) For the lifetime of the vessel
C) For a time not specified in the construction
D) Until the data report is signed by the Authorized Inspector
Answer: D……...ASME VIII , Full RT OF WELDED JOINTS [UW-51 (a)(1)(a)]
=========================================================
32. What is the maximum allowable continuous length of slag (elongated
indication) permitted in a radiograph of a repair weld in 1.25 inches thick
plate for a vessel stamped RT-1?
A) 0.312 inch.
B) 0.333 inch.
C) 0.417 inch.
D) 0.750 inch.
Answer: C……...ASME VIII, Full RT OF WELDED JOINTS [UW-51 (b)(2)]
Note: -
UW-51 (b)(2) any other elongated indication on the radiograph which has
length greater than:
(a) ¼ in. (6 mm) for t up to ¾ in. (19 mm)
(b) ⅓ t for t from ¾ in. (19 mm) to 2 ¼ in. (57 mm) so, 1.25 /3 = 0.417 inch.
(c) ¾ in. (19 mm) for t over 2 ¼ in. (57mm);

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

33. What is the maximum allowable continuous length of slag (elongated
indication) permitted in a radiograph of a repair weld in 2 ¼ - inches thick
plate for a vessel stamped RT-2?
A) 0.312 inch.
B) 0.333 inch.
C) 0.417 inch.
D) 0.750 inch.
Answer: D……...ASME VIII , Full RT OF WELDED JOINTS [UW-51 (b)(2)]
Note: -
UW-51 (b)(2) any other elongated indication on the radiograph which has
length greater than:
(a) ¼ in. (6 mm) for t up to ¾ in. (19 mm)
(b) ⅓ t for t from ¾ in. (19 mm) to 2 ¼ in. (57 mm) so, 2.25 /3 = 0.750 inch.
(c) ¾ in. (19 mm) for t over 2 ¼ in. (57mm);
=========================================================
34. What is the maximum length of a crack shown on a radiograph of a weld in
a 0.900 in. thick pressure vessel that would characterize this imperfection
as being are unacceptable and shall be repaired?
A) 1/4 in.
B) 1/3t
C) 3/4 in.
D) any indication
Answer: D……...ASME VIII , Full RT OF WELDED JOINTS [UW-51(b)(1)]
=========================================================
35. Full RT has been carried out on a vessel marked as RT-1. A 1 in (25 mm)
thick butt weld shows rounded indications. The required action will be to:
A) Reject the weld
B) Accept the weld
C) Downgrade the vessel to RT-2
D) Assess the rounded indications using the criteria in ASME VIII appendix 4
Answer: D……...ASME VIII , Full RT OF WELDED JOINTS [UW-51(b)(4)]
=========================================================
36. What is the maximum allowable round indication permitted in a
radiograph of a repair weld in 1.25 inches thick plate for a vessel stamped
RT-4?
A) 0.312 inch.
B) 0.333 inch.
C) 0.417 inch.
D) None, rounded indications are not a consideration with spot.
Answer: D……...ASME VIII , SPOT EXAMINATION OF WELDED JOINTS [UW-52
(c) (3)]

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

37. What is the maximum allowable continuous length of slag (elongated
indication) permitted in a radiograph of a repair weld in 1.25 inches thick
plate for a vessel stamped RT-4?
A) 0.312 inch.
B) 0.75 inch.
C) 0.83 inch.
D) 1.25 inches.
Answer: C……...ASME VIII , SPOT EXAMINATION OF WELDED JOINTS [UW-52
(c) (3)]
=========================================================
38. Which of the following is referenced by ASME Section VIII for qualification
of personnel performing radiography?
A) ASNT SNT-TC-1A
B) Manufacturer’s policies
C) ASME Section V
D) AWS QC-1.
Answer: A……...ASME VIII , Qualification Of Nondestructive Examination
Personnel [UW-54]
=========================================================
39. What is the minimum length of a spot radiograph?
A) 3 in
B) 6 in
C) 9 in
D) 12 in
Answer: B……...ASME VIII , SPOT EXAMINATION OF WELDED JOINTS [UW-52
(c)]
=========================================================
40. A spot radiograph fails the acceptance criteria. What should the inspector
request?
A) An additional shot in the same location as the failure
B) Two additional shots in the same location as the failure
C) Two additional shots, one in the same location as the failure and the other
remote from it
D) Two additional shots remote from the location of the failure
Answer: D……...ASME VIII , SPOT EXAMINATION OF WELDED JOINTS [UW-52
(d)(2)]

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

41. When radiographic examination has been performed on a pressure vessel
in accordance with UW-11, what marking shall be applied to the nameplate
when the complete vessel satisfies the requirements of UW-11(a)(5) and
when the spot radiography requirements of UW-11(a)(5)(b) have been
applied?
A) RT 1
B) RT 2
C) RT 3
D) RT 4
Answer: B……...ASME VIII , Markings for Radiographic Examination [UG-
116(e)(4)]
=========================================================
42. When radiographic examination has been performed on a pressure vessel
in accordance with UW-11, what marking shall be applied to the nameplate
when the complete vessel satisfies the spot radiography requirements of
UW-11(b)?
A) RT 1
B) RT 2
C) RT 3
D) RT 4
Answer: C……...ASME VIII , Markings for Radiographic Examination [UG-
116(e)(3)]
=========================================================
43. Materials that are to be used for repairs or alterations of pressure vessels
should be identified. What type of material requires a material test report
(MTR)?
A) Forged man way cover
B) Seamless pipe
C) Welded pipe
D) Plate
Answer: D……...ASME VIII , inspection of materials [UG-93]
=========================================================
44. Which of the following is not an acceptable source of information for
establishing the identification of vessel flange materials for an alteration?
A) Shipping receipt from a certified supplier
B) Original MTRs
C) Flange markings
D) Chemical analysis and mechanical tests of physical specimens
Answer: A……...ASME VIII , FLANGES AND PIPE FITTINGS [UG-44]

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

45. What type of materials shall be used for non-pressure parts which are
welded to a pressure vessel?
A) materials received with a certified test report
B) materials received with a certified test report referencing ASME Sec. II Part
A or B
C) material proven of weldable quality
D) material proven of weldable quality with a carbon equivalent < 0.35c) 3/4
in. (19 mm)
Answer: C……...ASME VIII , MATERIALS [UW-5(b)]
=========================================================
46. What is considered as proof to ensure materials used in the construction
of welded pressure vessels shall comply with the requirements for
materials given in UG-4 through UG-15, and be proven of weldable quality?
A) materials received with a certified test report
B) satisfactory qualification of the welding procedure under Section IX
C) materials received with a certified test report referencing ASME Sec. II Part
A or B
D) materials received with a certified test report referencing ASME Sec. II
Part D
Answer: B……...ASME VIII , MATERIALS [UW-5(a)]
=========================================================
47. What is considered as proof to ensure that non-pressure parts materials
that are only identifiable as to their nominal chemical analysis and
mechanical properties are proven to be of weldable quality for pressure
vessels?
A) must be recertified to UG-10(a)(1)(a)
B) must be recertified to UG-10(a)(1)(a) with a certified materials test report
C) satisfactory qualification of the welding procedure under Section IX
D) material proven of weldable quality with a carbon equivalent < 0.35
Answer: C……...ASME VIII , MATERIALS [UW-5(b)(2)]
=========================================================
48. How can an unidentifiable material used for a non-pressure part, to be
welded to a pressure vessel, be proven to be of weldable quality?
A) by preparing a butt-joint test coupon and passing a guided bend test as
specified in ASME Sec IX, QW-451
B) by preparing a butt-joint test coupon and passing a tensile test as specified
in ASME Sec. IX, QW-451
C) by preparing a butt-joint test coupon and passing an impact test as
specified in ASME Sec. IX, QW-451
d) unidentifiable materials used for a nonpressure part are not permitted to
be welded onto pressure vessel
Answer: A……...ASME VIII , MATERIALS [UW-5(b)(3)]

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

49. Which of the following codes is applicable to pressure vessel materials
that are subject to stress due to pressure?
A) ASME Sec. II, Part D
B) ASME Sec. III, Part D
C) NB-23
D) API 510
Answer: A……...ASME VIII , Materials Subject to Stress Due to Pressure [UG-
4(a)]
=========================================================
50. Which of the following is a nonpressure part of a pressure vessel?
A) skirts and supports
B) baffles
C) lugs and clips
D) all of the above
Answer: D……...ASME VIII , Materials Used for Non-pressure Parts [UG-4(B)]
=========================================================
51. Where are the requirements found for welding materials used for new
pressure vessel production?
A) ASME Sec. VIII Div. 1
B) ASME Sec. IX
C) the applicable qualified welding procedure specification
D) all of the above
Answer: D……...ASME VIII , WELDING MATERIALS [UG-9]
=========================================================
52. The minimum thickness permitted for shells and heads, after forming
and regardless of product form and material, shall be…..
A) 1/16 in. (1.5 mm) plus of any corrosion allowance
B) 1/16 in. (1.5 mm) exclusive of any corrosion allowance
C) 1/8 in. (3 mm) plus of any corrosion allowance
D) 1/8 in. (3 mm) exclusive of any corrosion allowance
Answer: B……...ASME VIII , Minimum Thickness of Pressure Retaining
Components [UGl6(b)]
=========================================================
53. What is the minimum allowable plate under-tolerance for new pressure
vessels that may be used at the full design pressure for the thickness ordered?
A) not more than the smaller value of 0.01 in. (0.25 mm) or 6% of the ordered
thickness
B) not more than the smaller value of 0.1 in. (2.5 mm) or 10%of the ordered
thickness
C) 12%of the ordered thickness
D) plate under-tolerance does not apply
Answer: A……...ASME VIII , Mill Under-tolerance [UG-l6(c)]

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

54. What do the dimensional symbols used in all design formulas throughout
ASME Sec. VIII Div. 1 represent?
A) dimensions in the corroded condition
B) dimensions in the un-corroded condition
C) dimensions with the corrosion allowance
D) any of the above
Answer: A……...ASME VIII , Corrosion Allowance [UG-l6(e)]
=========================================================
55. The MAWP of a vessel is 100 psig. Each head depth is 2’ and the cylindrical
portion of the shell is 32’. The shell should be designed for a pressure of
______ psig. 100 Psig.
A) 113 psi
B) 114.7 psi 2 ft
C)116 psi
D) 237 psi

34 ft

Answer: B……...ASME VIII , MAWP & Static Head calculation

=========================================================
56. A vessel’s MAWP is limited by the lower shell portion. This shell part has a
MAWP of 87.5 psig. What is the maximum allowed MAWP for this vessel?
A) 44 psi
B) 46 psi
C) 48 psi
D) 80 psi
1 ft

50 ft

100 ft

Answer: A……...ASME VIII , MAWP & Static Head calculation

=========================================================
57. A 80’ tall pressure vessel is being hydro tested. A pressure gauge 20’ up
from the bottom reads 136 psig. What is the pressure at the top of the vessel?
A) 100 psi
B) 110 psi

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

 Pbtm = p top+p s.h
C) 130 psi
D) 136 psi = 210 + (0.433*30)
= 222.99 psig.

Answer: B……...ASME VIII , MAWP & Static Head calculation

=========================================================
58. A 360 inches(9144 mm) fall water filled pressure vessel has an MAWP of
210 psi (1.45 Mpa) What pressure would be the bottom head of vessel be
designed for? (1 foot of water =0.433psi)
A) 197 psi (1.36 Mpa).
B) 210 psi (1.45 Mpa).
C) 225 psi (1.54 Mpa).
D) 240 psi (1.65 Mpa).
Answer: C……...ASME VIII , MAWP & Static Head calculation
=========================================================
59. A 125 feet high pressure vessel is to be hydrostatically tested. What is the
pressure at
the top of the vessel if a pressure of 169.5 psig is registered on a gage located
45 feet
from the top and another gage, located 100 feet from the top registers 193.5
psig? (1
foot of water = 0.433psi) p top = p gauge-p s.h
A) 204 psi
B) 189 psi = 169.5 - (0.433*45)
C) 150 psi
D) 140 psi = 150 psig.

Answer: C……...ASME VIII , MAWP & Static Head calculation

60.

Answer: B……...ASME VIII , MAWP & Static Head calculation

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam
61. Standard ellipsoidal head with 11/2 inch flange is attached to the bottom of
vertical vessel . The heads inside diameter is 65 inches .the vessel has a total
elevation of 100 feet . The elevation at this head to shell joint is f feet . What
amount of hydrostic head must be considered for use in this head’s required
thickness calculation?
A) 41.135 psi
B) 41.909 psi
C) 41 psi
D) 41.69 psi

Answer: D……...ASME VIII , MAWP & Static Head calculation

=========================================================
62. A horizontal vessel is filled with H²O under pressure. It has an internal
diameter of 8 ft with a communicating chamber, which extent ends 1.5 ft
below this horizontal vessel. Tis vessel operates at working pressure of 120
psi. What will be pressure values on a gage mounted on the bottom of the
vessel’s communicating chamber?
A) 150 psi
B) 124.11 psi
C) 153.46 psi
D) 199.36 psi

Answer: B……...ASME VIII , MAWP & Static Head calculation

63. At what location is MAWP specified?
A) Always at the top of a vessel
B) Always at the bottom of a vessel
C) At the location where the pressure gauge is located
D) Any of the above, as long as you specify where it is

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

Answer: A……...ASME VIII , Maximum Allowable Working Pressure (MAWP)
[UG-98(a)]
=========================================================
64. A 120 ft tall vertical pressure vessel is being hydro tested using water and
has 4 pressure gauges located at the bottom of the vessel, at 40 ft from the
top, at 80 ft from top, and at the top of the vessel. If the pressure at the 40 ft
gauge reads 200 psi, what would be the maximum hydrostatic pressure?
Round to the nearest whole number.
A) 113 psi
B) 165 psi
C) 217 psi
D) 237 psi
Answer: D……...ASME VIII , Hydrostatic Test Pressure
=========================================================
65. What is the current multiplier of hydrostatic test pressure compared to
MAWP, excluding any temperature correction?
A) 1.1
B) 1.3
C) 1.5
D) It depends on the amount of RT that has been done (RT1, RT2, etc.)
Answer: B……...ASME VIII , standard hydrostatic test [UG-99(b)]
=========================================================
66. A vessel with a MAWP of 1000 psi at a design temperature of 700 F is
hydrostatically
tested at 1300 psi at ambient temperature. What is wrong with this?
A) Nothing
B) The vessel has been overstressed
C) The vessel has not been stressed high enough to test its integrity
D) The low temperature will provide a brittle fracture risk
Answer: C……...ASME VIII , standard hydrostatic test [UG-99(b)]
=========================================================
67. A new vessel is to be installed in a system. The vessel is stamped with a
MAWP of 150psi at 300°F. It was fabricated from a material that has the same
allowable stress at design temperature as at test temperature. The vessel
operating pressure is 140psi at a MDMT of 20°F. Which of the following is the
correct post fabrication hydrostatic test pressure?
A) 225psi
B) 210psi
C) 195psi
D) 182psi
Answer: C……...ASME VIII , standard hydrostatic test [UG-99(b)]

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

68. A vessel has a design pressure of 125 psi and a design temperature of 600
8F. The material allowable stresses (S) are shown in ASME II as follows: S at
ambient temperature =18.8 ksi & S at 600 8F = 11.4 ksi What is the correct
hydrostatic test pressure at ambient temperature?
A) 98.5 psi
B) 162.5 psi
C) 192 psi
D) 270 psi
Answer: D……...ASME VIII , standard hydrostatic test [UG-99(b)]
=========================================================
69. A vessel has a design pressure of 200 psi and a design temperature of 400
F. The material allowable stresses (S) are shown in ASME II as follows: S at
ambient temperature = 20 ksi & S at 400 8F = 18 ksi ASME VIII Pressure
Design 153 , If it is hydrostatically tested at ambient temperature, at what
pressure should an inspection be made of the weld joints and seams?
A) 200 psi
B) 222 psi
C) 289 psi
D) None of the above
Answer: B……...ASME VIII , standard hydrostatic test [UG-99(g)]
=========================================================
70. What type of liquid may be used at any temperature for a pressure vessel
hydrostatic test, if below its boiling point?
A) water
B) water and anti-freeze if below 32°F
C) petroleum distillates
D) any non-hazardous liquid
Answer: D……...ASME VIII , standard hydrostatic test [UG-99(h)]
=========================================================
71. As per ASME Sec. VIII, Div. 1, if permanent deformation is observed due to
over pressure during hydrotesting:
A) The inspector should ask for re-test using proper test pressure.
B) Follow-up the hydro-testing by a pneumatic test at proper pressure, taking
suitable precautions as given in code for pneumatic test.
C) The inspector may ask for providing additional stiffening rings around
vessel and carry out rehydrotest at proper test pressure.
D) The inspector may reject the vessel.
Answer: D……...ASME VIII , standard hydrostatic test [UG-99(d)]
=========================================================
72. Which of these statements is false?
A) A pneumatic test places the vessel under less stress than a hydrostatic test
B) A pneumatic test has more chance of resulting in brittle fracture

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

C) A pneumatic test is more dangerous than a hydrostatic test
D) A pneumatic test may be allowed on vessels that have not had 100 % RT
Answer: B……...ASME VIII , Pneumatic Test [UG-100 & UG-20]
=========================================================
73. A vessel is to be pneumatically tested to 100 psi with air. The vessel is
manufactured from a material that has a minimum design metal temperature
of 10 F. What is the minimum temperature at which the vessel can be safely
tested?
A) 10 F
B) 30 F
C) 40 F
D) 68 F
Answer: C……...ASME VIII , : Pneumatic Test [UG-100(c)]
=========================================================
74. What are the increments used to increase the pressure up to pneumatic
test pressure?
A) Increase gradually to 50 % design pressure followed by 10 % increments
B) Increase gradually by 10 % increments
C) Increase gradually to 50 % test pressure followed by 10 % increments
D) Increase gradually to 1.3 X design pressure followed by 10 % increments
Answer: C……...ASME VIII , : Pneumatic Test [UG-100(d)]
=========================================================
75. A vessel has a design pressure of 200 psi and a design temperature of 400
F. The material allowable stresses (S) are shown in ASME II as follows:
S at ambient temperature = 20 ksi S at 400 F = 18 ksi If it is pneumatically
tested at ambient temperature, and as it is air and has no hydrostatic head
effects, at what pressure should a leakage inspection be made of the weld
joints and seams?
A) 200 psi
B) 222 psi
C) 244 psi
D) 260psi
Answer: B ……...ASME VIII , : Pneumatic Test [UG-100(d)]
=========================================================
76. Under what condition(s) may a pneumatic test be used in lieu of the
standard hydrostatic test prescribed in UG-99 for vessels?
A) when the pressure vessel is designed such that it cannot safely be
supported when filled with water
B) when the pressure vessel cannot be not readily dried
C) when the pressure vessel is to be used in services where traces of the
testing liquid cannot be tolerated
D) all of the above

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

Answer: D……...ASME VIII , : Pneumatic Test [UG-100(a)]
77. What is the maximum time allotted to perform the visual inspection
during pneumatic testing of a vessel?
A) 1 hour
B) 4 hour
C) 8 hours
D) a sufficient time to permit inspection of the vessel
Answer: D……...ASME VIII , : Pneumatic Test [UG-100(d)]
=========================================================
78. A vessel is to be pneumatically pressure tested to 250 psi. This test
pressure will be reached in how many stages of pressurization?
A) 5 stages
B) 2 stages
C) 6 stages
D) 7 stages
Answer: C……...ASME VIII , : Pneumatic Test [UG-100(d)]
=========================================================
79. A vessel is to be pneumatically pressure tested to 250 psi. what will be the
incremental values of pressurization at first and second stage if pneumatic
test pressure is 250 psi?
A) 125 psi, 25 psi
B) 50 psi, 50 psi
C) 100 psi, 50 psi
D) None of above
Answer: A……...ASME VIII , : Pneumatic Test [UG-100(d)]
=========================================================
80. For design pressure and temperature limits of 1,100 psig and 700°F using
SA-106 grade B as the shell material, what is the minimum pneumatic test
pressure required with a test temperature at 75°F? S at design temperature is
15.6 ksi and S at test temperature is 17.1 ksi. Round to the nearest whole
number?
A) 1,103 psi
B) 1,210 psi
C) 1,326 psi
D) 1,416 psi
Answer: C……...ASME VIII , : Pneumatic Test [UG-100(b)]
=========================================================
81. Which of the following is Nondestructive Examination of Welds on
Pneumatically Tested Vessels?
A) MPT
B) PT .
C) UT.

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

D) RT.
E) MPI or PT
Answer: E……...ASME VIII , : NDE of Welds on Pneumatically Tested Vessels
[UW-50]
=========================================================
82. What is the maximum upper range for a dial gage used during
a hydrostatic test?
A) 1.25 times the test pressure
B) 1.5 times the test pressure
C) 2 times the test pressure
D) 4 times the test pressure
Answer: D……...ASME VIII , : TEST GAGES [UG-102]
=========================================================
83. A vessel is to be pressure tested to 150 psi. Which of the following ranges
should be used for the test gauge?
A) 0–200 psi
B) 0–175 psi
C) 0–500 psi
D) 0–750 psi
Answer: C……...ASME VIII , : TEST GAGES [UG-102]
=========================================================
84. You are planning for the Hydro-test of a complete vessel with Hydro test
pressure
40Kg/cm2g. The calibrated test gauges available with you are 0-50 Kg/cm2g,
0-100 Kg/cm2g, 1-150 Kg/cm2g and 0-200 Kg/cm2g. Which two gauges are
acceptable for this test?
0-50 Kg/cm2g and 0-100 Kg/cm2g
A) 0-100 Kg/cm2g and 0-200 Kg/cm2g
B) 0-50 Kg/cm2g and 0-200 Kg/cm2g
C) 0-100 Kg/cm2g and 0-150 Kg/cm2g
Answer: C……...ASME VIII , : TEST GAGES [UG-102]
=========================================================
85. Which of the following loadings are mandatory in designing a pressure
vessel?
A) internal design pressure
B) external design pressure
C) internal or external design pressure
D) internal and external design pressure, not including snow, wind, and
seismic loading
Answer: C……...ASME VIII , : Loadings [UG-22(a) ]

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

86. Which of the following loadings are mandatory in designing a pressure
vessel?
A) weight of the vessel and normal contents under operating or test
conditions
B) rain and sleet, where required
C)shear reactions such as those due to normal fluid flow
D)temperature plateaus and similar thermal expansion
Answer: A……...ASME VIII , : Loadings [UG-22(b) ]
=========================================================
87. At a welded joint in a casting, what is the appropriate factor to be applied
to the allowable stress value for the cast material?
A) either the casting quality factor or the weld joint efficiency may be selected
B) the lesser of the casting quality factor or the weld joint efficiency
C) the larger of the casting quality factor or the weld joint efficiency
D) the mean value of the casting quality factor or the weld joint efficiency
Answer: B……...ASME VIII , : Castings Quality Factors [UG-24(a)]
=========================================================
88. What is the maximum quality factor to be applied to the allowable stress
value for a high alloy steel static casting when examined in accordance with
all of the requirements of ASME Sec. VIII Div. 1 Appendix 7?
A) 70%
B) 80%
C) 85%
D) 100%
Answer: D……...ASME VIII , : Castings Quality Factors [UG-24(a)(5)(b)]
=========================================================
89. For a quality factor greater than 80%, how shall the casting be marked?
A) name, trademark, or other identification of the manufacturer, and casting
identification
B) quality factor
C) material designation
D) all of the above
Answer: D……...ASME VIII , : Castings Quality Factors [UG-24(c)]
=========================================================
90. What is the criterion for establishing a tapered weld joint in a pressure
vessel?
A) where joints between sections differ by 1/8 in. (3 mm)
B) where joints between sections differ > 1/4 in. (6 mm)
C) where joints between sections differ > 1/3 the thickness of the thinner
section
D) where joints between sections differ > 1/4 the thickness of the thinner
section or > 1/8 in. (3 mm),whichever is less

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

Answer: D……...ASME VIII , : DESIGN OF WELDED JOINTS [UW-9(c)]
=========================================================
91. When radiographic examination is not performed, what is the required
staggered spacing for the centres of welded longitudinal joints of adjacent
courses in a pressure vessel?
A) 2 times the thickness of the thicker plate
B) 3.5 times the thickness of the thicker plate
C) 5 times the thickness of the thicker plate
D) 5 times the thickness of the thicker plate or > 1/8 in. (3 mm), whichever is
less
Answer: C……...ASME VIII , : DESIGN OF WELDED JOINTS [UW-9(d)]
=========================================================
92. When a pressure vessel weld joint is tapered, what is the required
transition, where ℓ is the required length of taper and y is the offset between
adjacent surfaces of abutting sections?
A) ℓ ≥ y
B) ℓ ≥2y
C) ℓ ≥3y
D) ℓ ≥4y
Answer: C……...ASME VIII , : DESIGN OF WELDED JOINTS [UW-9(c), Fig. UW-
9]
=========================================================
93. The stress trying to split a vessel shell longitudinal weld open is called?
A) Hoop stress
B) Circumferential stress
C) Longitudinal stress
D) (a) and/or (b) above
Answer: D……...ASME VIII , : shells under internal pressure [UG-27(c)(1)]
=========================================================
94. The main cylinder dimension used in the UG-27 cylinder formulae is?
A) Internal diameter
B) External diameter
C) Internal radius
D) External radius
Answer: C……...ASME VIII , : shells under internal pressure [UG-27(b)]]
=========================================================
95. What does the symbol R define when used to calculate the minimum
required thickness of shells under internal pressure?
A) external radius of the shell course under consideration
B) inside radius of the head course under consideration
C) joint efficiency in cylindrical or spherical shells
D) inside radius of the shell course under consideration

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

Answer: D……...ASME VIII , : shells under internal pressure [UG-27(b)]
=========================================================
96. What does the symbol E define when used to calculate the minimum
required thickness of shells under internal pressure?
A) inside radius of the shell course under consideration
B) maximum allowable stress value
C) joint efficiency in cylindrical or spherical shells
D) internal design pressure
Answer: C……...ASME VIII , : shells under internal pressure [UG-27(b)]
=========================================================
97. What does the symbol t define when used to calculate the minimum
required thickness of shells under internal pressure?
A) maximum required thickness of shell
B) maximum shell tensile strength
C) minimum shell tensile strength
D) minimum required thickness of shell
Answer: D……...ASME VIII , : shells under internal pressure [UG-27(b)]
98. A vessel with a longitudinally seamed shell circumferentially welded to
hemispherical heads is pressurized internally until it fails. Which of these
formulae would you use to calculate the pressure at which the split would
occur?
A) P = 2SEt/(R + 0.2t)
B) P = 2SEt/(R - 0.4t)
C) P = 2SEt/(R + 0.6t)
D) Either (b) or (c) above
Answer: C……...ASME VIII , : shells under internal pressure [UG-27(c)(1)]
=========================================================
99. An ASME Section VIII , Cylinder of process vessel has the following
characteristics:
ID = 60 inches (1524), Joint efficiency = 1.0, allowable stress = 17500 psi
(120.6
MPa) , and design pressure (including static head) = 500 psig. If the vessel is
uniformly corroded, what is the minimum required thickness of the shell
under design
conditions?
A) 0.857 inch (21.8 mm)
B) 0.872 inch (22.1 mm)
C) 1.714 inches(43.5 mm)
D) 1.744 inches(44.3 mm)

Answer: B……...ASME VIII , : shells under internal pressure [UG-27(c)(1)]

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

100. Which of these vessels could you not use the UG-27(c)(1) formulae for
(using a given joint efficiency of E =1) if the material has an allowable stress
at its design temperature of 20 ksi?
A) P = 0.5 psi
B) P = 100 psi
C) P = 2000 psi
D) P = 8000 psi

Answer: D……...ASME VIII , : shells under internal pressure[UG-27(c)(1)]

=========================================================
101. A sphere has an ID of 80 feet, the material of construction is A-516 Gr. 70
(allowable stress = 20000psi), the weld joint efficiency is 85%. The minimum
thickness of plate material is 2.5 inches without a corrosion allowance. What
is the MAWP excluding head pressure?
A) 1049 psi
B) 105 psi
C) 176 psi
D) 2099 psi
Answer: C……...ASME VIII , : shells under internal pressure [UG-27(c)(1)]
=========================================================
102. A vessel has the following given parameters OD = 36 in , Wall thickness =
1 in, Joint efficiency E = 1 Allowable stress at design temperature = 20 ksi
What is the maximum allowable working pressure (MAWP) at its design
temperature?
A) 546 psi
B) 895 psi P=SEt/R"-4t
C) 1136 psi
D) 2409 psi
Answer: C……...ASME VIII , : shells under internal pressure [UG-27(c)(1)]
t Corroded = 0.353"
t Orig. = 0.375"
=========================================================
103. What is the maximum allowed working pressure on the following shell?
The shell’s inside radius is 52 inches, and the shell’s thickness is .850 inches.
The allowable stress for the shell's material is 15,000 psi. The joint efficiency
of the shell's Category A joint is 1.0 ?
A) 240 psi
B) 242 psi
C) 245 psi
D) 250 psi
Answer: B……...ASME VIII , : shells under internal pressure [UG-27(c)(1)]

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

104. A vessel shell has a design pressure of 200 psi, and an allowable stress of
14,800 psi. The inside radius is 84”. The nameplate is stamped RT-3 . The
shell has corroded down to 0.353 inches. Its original t was 0.375 inches. What
is its current calculated MAWP in accordance with rules of Section VIII
Division 1?
A) 50 psi
B) 52 psi
C)55 psi
D)56 psi

Answer: B……...ASME VIII , : shells under internal pressure [UG-27(c)(1)]

=========================================================
105. A pressure vessel is being designed to have a cylindrical shell with an
inside
radius of 8 ft, a MAWP of 1,100 psi, made of SA-516 grade 70, normalized,
operating
at 500°F, with an allowable stress value of 20,000 psi, that was constructed
with
Type (2) weld joints and spot radiography. What is the minimum thickness
required
for this design?
a) 7.283 in.
b) 6.884 in.
c) 4.656 in.
d) 5.460 in.

Answer: B……...ASME VIII , : shells under internal pressure [UG-27(c)(1)]

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

106. Calculate the thickness required for a vessel’s seamless shell made of SA-
106 gr. B pipe. The O.D. is 12.75 inches. UW-11(a)(5)(b) has been applied. The
shell will operate at a maximum of 500 psi. The stress allowed on the shell
material is 15,000 psi. The vessel will be stamped RT 2.?
A) 0.280 in.
B) 0.290in.
C) 0.210 in.
D) 0.211 in
Answer: C……...ASME VIII , : shells under internal pressure [UG-27(c)(1)]
=========================================================
107. A horizontal vessel has an internal diameter of 10 ft. The material’s
allowable stress is 14,000 psi. The MAWP of the vessel is 120 psi. The welds
are all Type 1 and full RT was performed. Determine the minimum required
thickness?
a) 0.280 in.
b) 0.290in.
c) 0.535 in.
d) 0.433 in.
Answer: C……...ASME VIII , : shells under internal pressure [UG-27(c)(1)]
=========================================================
108. What is the maximum acceptable out of roundness for a 50 inches
nominal ID vessel shell, unless a detailed analysis is performed?
A) 1/8 inch
B) ¼ inch
C) 3/8 inch
D) ½ inch
Answer: D……...ASME VIII , : Out-Of-Roundness [UG-80]
Out-Of-Roundness [UG-80]
=========================================================
109. New seamless ellipsoidal head is added to a horizontal drum. It is 1.375
inches (34.9 mm) thick with a design pressure of 550 psi (3.79 MPa)
(Including static head) at 200 ºF (93 ºC). the fabrication material’s allowable
stress is 17500 psi (120.7 MPa), and the head’s ID is 60 inches (1524 mm). The
head-to-shell weld is a type 1 joint and is 100% radiographed. The specified
corrosion allowance is 0.125 inch (3.2 mm). What is the actual corrosion
allowance for the new head?
A) 0.125 inch (3.2 mm).
B) 0.304 inch (7.7 mm).
C) 0.429 inch (10.9 mm).
D) 0.946 inch (24.0 mm).

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

Answer: C……...ASME VIII , : Minimum Required Thickness of Heads [UG-
32(c)]
=========================================================
110. Calculation of the remaining life of a pressure vessel will be based on the
seamless 2:1 ellipsoidal bottom head, with an ID of 48 inches. The allowable
material stress is 17,500psi, the design pressure including static head is 500
psi, and the thicknesses 1 inch. The corrosion allowance is 1/8 inch, and the
corrosion rate on the head is 0.019 inch per year. The head to shell weld is a
type 1 joint. That was examined by RT-1. The minimum required thickness of
the head is:
A) 0.563 inch
B) 0.688 inch
C) 0.813 inch = 500 psi, ID=4P8” , S= 17500 psi, E= 1.00 , tactual = 1’’
D) 0.857 inch
Answer: B……...ASME VIII , : Minimum Required Thickness of Heads [API 510
[Link], VIII- 1, UG-32(c)]
=========================================================
111. A seamless standard torispherical head with an inside crown radius of 64
inches (1.63 M) has a current thickness of 0.563” (8mm). The original MAWP
was 125 psi (0.86 MPa). The vessel has been in service for ten years. The
operating parameters will be lowered to 100psi and the vessel will be de-
rated. The original head plate thickness was 0.6875” (17.5mm), allowable
stress (S) = 15,500psi, joint efficiency of 0.85, and had a corrosion allowance
of 0.125” (3.2mm). What is the minimum required thickness of the head for
the new condition?
A) 0.20 inch (5.08 mm)
B) 0.305 inch (6.2mm)
C) 0.399 inch (9.3mm) P= 100 psi, ID=64” , S= 15500 psi, E= 0.85
D) 0.430 inch (10.9mm)
Answer: A……...ASME VIII , : Minimum Required Thickness of Heads [API 510
[Link], VIII- 1, [UG-32(d)]
=========================================================
112. A pressure vessel is to be re-rated, the vessel nameplate is stamped RT-4
and the joint efficiency is 1.0. Considering the 1.336 (measured thickness) 2:1
ellipsoidal head, what is the maximum design pressure of the head? The data
report provides the following information: the head is seamless and has an
inside diameter of 60.0625”, the allowable stress of the head material is
17500psi, and the head is attached to the vessel by a Category B, Type 1 joint.
A) 542psi
B) 620psi
C) 659psi
D) 775psi

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

Answer: D……...ASME VIII , : Minimum Required Thickness of Heads [UG-
32(c)]
=========================================================
113. Which of the following heads will normally require the greatest wall
thickness
for the same design conditions?
A) Tori spherical
B) 2:1 elliptical
C) Hemispherical
D) Flat head.
Answer: D……...ASME VIII , : General knowledge [UG-32 /UG-34]
=========================================================
114. At what point in a tori spherical or conical head is the minimum required
thickness to be calculated?
A) at the thinnest point before forming
B) at the thickest point before forming
C) at the thinnest point after forming
D) at the thickest point after forming
Answer: C……...ASME VIII , : Minimum Required Thickness of Heads [UG-
32(a)]
=========================================================
115. What is the absolute minimum allowable thickness of a vessel head of any
design, irrespective of service fluid and material, if it is to have a corrosion
allowance of 2 mm?
A) 3.5 mm
B) 4 mm
C) 6 mm
D) 8 mm
Answer: A……...ASME VIII , : Minimum Required Thickness of Heads [UG-32
and UG-16 (b)]
=========================================================
116. Which of these head designs has a knuckle radius and crown radius?
A) Hemispherical
B) Any ellipsoidal design
C) Tori spherical
D) Ellipsoidal with a t/L ratio of not less than 0.002
Answer: C……...ASME VIII , : Minimum Required Thickness of Heads [UG-
32(d)]

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

117. What is the minimum required thickness (tcorroded) of a 2:1 ellipsoidal
head of t/L > 0.002 with the following dimensions:
D = inside diameter of 40 inches , P = pressure of 300 psi , E = 0.85 (double-
sided butt weld with spot examination (UW-12)) & S = 15 800 psi
A) 0.4 in
B) 0.45 in
C) 0.55 in
D) None of the above
Answer: D……...ASME VIII , : Minimum Required Thickness of Heads [UG-
32(d)]
=========================================================
118. Calculate the required thickness of a 2 to 1 Ellipsoidal head with an inside
diameter of 48 inches. The vessels will have a MAWP of 350 psi and will be in
lethal service and stamped RT1. The joint used to join the head to shell will be
a Type No. 2 from Table UW-12. The stress allowed on the head's material will
be 15,000 psi.
A) 0.356’’
B) 0.435’’
C) 0.566’’
D) 0.561’’

Answer: B……...ASME VIII , : Minimum Required Thickness of Heads [UG-

32(c)]
=========================================================
119. A Torispherical head has corroded to a thickness of .353 " ; its inside
crown radius is 56 inches. The head's material has a stress allowable of
13,800 psi. The shell is seamless and the spot radiography of UW-11(a)(5)(b)
has been applied to the vessel. Can this head remain in service at 100 psi per
Code?
A) 0.356’’
B) 0.367’’
C) 0.360’’
D) 0.461’’
Answer: A……...ASME VIII , : Minimum Required Thickness of Heads [UG-
32(d)]
=========================================================
120. A Hemispherical head is being considered as a replacement on a vessel
with a MAWP of 200 psi. The head's Inside diameter will be 64 inches. What
would be its required thickness if the head's material has a maximum
allowable stress of 17,500 psi? The Category A type 1 joint that attaches the
head will be spot radiographed ?

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

a) 0.215’’
b) 0.367’’
a) 0.360’’
b) 0.461’’

Answer: A……...ASME VIII , : Minimum Required Thickness of Heads [UG-

32(e)]
=========================================================
121. What would the required thickness for a seamless Ellipsoidal head be
given
the following variables? The Category B weld that will attach this head would
not
have UW-11(a)(5)(b) applied?
a) 0.215’’
b) 0.367’’
a) 0.360’’
b) 0.430’’
Answer: B……...ASME VIII , : Minimum Required Thickness of Heads [UG-
32(c)]
=========================================================
122. A vertical pressure vessel has an ellipsoidal head at the top of the shell
that is
under pressure on the concave side, designated as RT 1 with full radiography.
The
head has an inside diameter of 4.75 ft, is made from SA-516 grade 70, and
operates
at a MAWP of 800 psi and 150°F, where the allowable stress is 20,000 psi.
What is
the minimum thickness required for these conditions?
a) 0.990 in.
b) 1.100 in.
c) 1.145 in.
d) 1.499 in.
Answer: C……...ASME VIII , : Minimum Required Thickness of Heads [UG-
32(c)]
=========================================================
123. As part of a fitness for service analysis of a corroded region in the central
portion of a 2:1 seamless ellipsoidal head, what would be the total thickness
required to maintain a corrosion allowance of 3/16 in. under the following
conditions? MAWP on the concave side is 225 psi, head inside diameter 4 ft,
material

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

is SA-516 grade 70 and operates at 125°F, where the allowable stress is 20,000
psi.
A) 0.243 in.
B) 0.250 in.
C) 0.375 in.
D) 0.431 in.
Answer: D……...ASME VIII , : Minimum Required Thickness of Heads [API 510
<[Link], VIII-1, UG-32(c)]
=========================================================
124. What is the allowable deviation of the inner surface of a torispherical
head?
A) ≤ 5/8% of D outside deviation of the specified shape
B) ≤ 7/8% of D inside deviation of the specified shape
C) ≤ 1-1/4% of D inside deviation of the specified shape
D) ≤ 1-1/4% of D outside deviation of the specified shape
Answer: D……...ASME VIII , : Tolerance For Formed Heads [UG-81(a)]
=========================================================
125. When it is necessary to post weld heat-treat a vessel in more than one
heat one heat due to length, which of the following is the minimum overlap of
the heated section?
A) 1 foot (305 mm)
B) 3 feet (914 mm)
C) 5 feet (1524 mm)
D) 10 feet (3048 mm)
Answer: C……...ASME VIII , : PWHT with Multiple Heats [UW-40(a)(2)]
=========================================================
126. What is used as the nominal thickness dimension of a full penetration
butt weld joining a vessel head to a shell when the materials are of unequal
thickness?
A) The thickness of the thinnest part including the weld cap
B) The thickness of the thinnest part excluding the weld cap
D) The thickness of the thickest part excluding the weld cap
Answer: D……...ASME VIII , : Procedures for PWHT [UW-40 (f)(1) & (f)(5)(a)]
=========================================================
127. What is the minimum width of a PWHT soak band in the construction of a
new pressure vessel?
A) a minimum of 2 in. from the center line of the weld in all directions
B) a minimum of 3 in. from the center line of the weld in all directions
C) shall extend at least 1 in. (25 mm) beyond each edge of the weld or 2 in.,
whichever is less
D) widest width of weld plus 1t or 2 in. (50 mm), whichever is less, on each
side or end of the weld

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

Answer: D……...ASME VIII , : Procedures for PWHT [UW-40(a)]
=========================================================
128. What is the preferable procedure for PWHT a new pressure vessel?
A) by locally PWHT with electric blankets
B) by locally PWHT with electric blankets that are insulated with ceramic
C) heating the vessel in more than one heat in a furnace, provided the overlap
of the heated sections of the vessel is at least 5 ft (1.5 m)
D) as a whole in an enclosed furnace
Answer: D……...ASME VIII , : Procedures for PWHT [UW-40(a)(1)]
=========================================================
129. As a minimum, what makes up the soak band for PWHT in the
construction of a new pressure vessel?
A) shall contain the weld, heat affected zone adjacent to the weld being heat
treated
B) shall contain the weld and a portion of base metal adjacent to the weld
being heat treated
C) shall contain the weld, heat affected zone, and a portion of base metal
adjacent to the weld
being heat treated
D) a minimum of 3 in. from the center line of the weld in all directions
Answer: C……...ASME VIII , : Procedures for PWHT [UW-40(a)]
=========================================================
130. What is the total minimum width of a PWHT soak band in the
construction of a new pressure vessel that has a nominal thickness of 0.625
in., a maximum weld width of 1.0 in., and made from P-No. 5A material?
A) 1.625 in.
B) 2.25 in.
C) 4.25 in.
D) 5.00 in.
Answer: B……...ASME VIII , : Procedures for PWHT [UW-40(a)]
=========================================================
131. A section of vessel is being manufactured with SA-516 Gr. 70 material that
has thickness of 2.75 inches . The minimum postweld heat treatment (PWHT)
holding time is :
A) 2 hours
B) 2 hours 12 minutes
C) 2 hours 15 minutes
D) 3 hours
Answer: B……...ASME VIII , : Requirements for PWHT [table UCS-56]
=========================================================

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

132. A section of vessel is being manufactured with SA-516 Gr. 70 material
that has thickness of 3 inches . The minimum postweld heat treatment
(PWHT) holding time is :
A) 2 hours
B) 2 hours 15 minutes
C) 2 hours 30 minutes
D) 3 hours
Answer: B……...ASME VIII , Requirements for PWHT [table UCS-56]
133. Shell corroded material SA-302 Gr.B need to be repaired by overlay
cladding. What is the maximum thickness can be repaired without post-weld
heat treatment (PWHT):
A) ¼ inch.
B) ½ inch.
C) 5/8 inch.
D) 1 ½ inches.
Answer: C……...ASME VIII , Requirements for PWHT [table UCS-56]
=========================================================
134. Under what circumstance can PWHT be omitted?
A) When it is only a service requirement
B) When it is below the minimum thickness specified for the P-number in
UCS-56
C) When electron beam welding ferritic materials> 1/8 in (3.2 mm) thick
D) When electroslag welding ferritic materials > 1 1/2 in (38 mm) thick
Answer: B……...ASME VIII , Requirements for PWHT [UCS-56]
=========================================================
135. What is the maximum temperature variation permitted in a vessel
during PWHT heating?
A) 250 F (140 C) within any 15 ft (4.6 m) interval of length
B) 400 F (204 C) within any 15 ft (4.6 m) interval of length
C) 500 F (260 C) within any 15 ft (4.6 m) interval of length
D) 150 F (67 C) within any 15 ft (4.6 m) interval of length
Answer: A……...ASME VIII , Requirements for PWHT [UCS-56 (d)(2)]
=========================================================
136. A vessel is manufactured of P1 Group 2 material and is 4 in (102 mm)
thick. What is the required PWHT holding temperature and minimum time at
temperature?
A) 1100 F (593 C) for 2 hours
B) 1100 F (593 C) for 2 1/2 hours
C) 1100 F (593 C) for 1 hour
D) None of the above
Answer: B……...ASME VIII , Requirements for PWHT [table UCS-56]

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

137. What is the PWHT minimum holding time for a 10 in (254 mm) thick P4
Group 2 material?
A) 2 hours
B) 3 hours 15 minutes
C) 5 hours
D) 6 hours 15 minutes
Answer: D……...ASME VIII , Requirements for PWHT [table UCS-56]
=========================================================
138. What is the maximum permitted temperature of a PWHT furnace at the
time a pressure vessel is placed in it?
A) 400°F (205°C)
B) 500°F (260°C)
C) 800°F (425°C)
D) 100°F (56°C) above room temperature
Answer: C……...ASME VIII , Requirements for PWHT [UCS-56(d)(1)]
=========================================================
139. Above 800°F (425°C) in a PWHT furnace, what is the maximum rate of
heating for a pressure vessel made from SA-516 grade 70, normalized, with a
nominal thickness of 1.0 in.?
A) 100°F/hr (56°C/h)
B) 200°F/hr (111°C/h)
C) 400°F/hr (222°C/h)
D) 500°F/hr (280°C/h)
Answer: C……...ASME VIII , Requirements for PWHT [UCS-56(d)(2)]
=========================================================
140. During PWHT heating and holding periods for pressure vessels, why is it
mandatory to control furnace atmosphere, other than for temperature?
A) to avoid excessive condensation of the surface of the vessel
B) to avoid excessive thermal expansion of the surface of the vessel
C) to avoid excessive thermal contraction of the surface of the vessel
D) to avoid excessive oxidation of the surface of the vessel
Answer: D……...ASME VIII , Requirements for PWHT [UCS-56(d)(4)]
=========================================================
141. What is the permitted total weld repair depth for the construction of a
pressure vessel with a P-No. 1 Group No. 3 material?
a) shall not exceed 1 in. (25 mm)
b) shall not exceed 1-1/4 in. (32 mm)
c) shall not exceed 1-1/2 in. (38 mm)
d) as required to make the repair
Answer: C……...ASME VIII , Requirements for PWHT [UCS-56(f)(2)]

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

 142. A pressure vessel is being constructed of SA-387 Gr. 2, Cl. 2 material,
where after welding, NDE has revealed several cracks that need to be
repaired. In addition to the requirements in ASME Sec. IX, what welding
process and filler metal shall be used?
a) SMAW using low hydrogen electrodes
b) SMAW using low hydrogen electrodes or GMAW
c) SMAW using low hydrogen electrodes or GMAW (excluding short-circuiting)
d) by the same welding process originally used
Answer: A……...ASME VIII , Requirements for PWHT [UCS-56(f)(4)(a)]
=========================================================
143. When repair welding a pressure vessel nozzle made from SA-335 grade P1
material during construction, what welding technique is required?
a) stringer welds only
b) stringer welds with controlled heat input
c) temper bead stringer welds only
d) weld temper bead reinforcement
Answer: D……...ASME VIII , Requirements for PWHT [UCS-56(f)(4)(c)]
=========================================================
144. What is the minimum PWHT temperature and minimum holding time for
SA- 335 grade P11 with a nominal wall thickness of 2.50 in.?
a) 1100°F for 2 hours
b) 1200°F for 2 hours
c) 1100°F for 2.5 hours
d) 1200°F for 2.5 hours
Answer: D……...ASME VIII , Requirements for PWHT [Table UCS-56]
=========================================================
145. What is the minimum PWHT holding time for a 2 in. thick nozzle attached
to a pressure vessel made from SA-335 grade P2 and PWHT at 1000°F?
a) 1 hours
b) 2 hours
c) 2.25 hours
d) 4.25 hours
Answer: D……...ASME VIII , Alternative Heat Treatment of Carbon and Low
Alloy Steels [Table UCS-S6.1 ]
=========================================================
146. How is the minimum metal temperature determined for pressure vessel
design, not including the exceptions permitted by ASME Sec. VIII Div. 1?
a) shall be the mean value expected in service
b) shall be the lowest expected in service
c) shall be the highest expected in service
d) as required for the MAWP
Answer: B……...ASME VIII , Design Temperature [UG-20(b)]

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

147. When there are multiple MAWPs marked on the nameplate of a pressure
vessel, which MAWP value shall be used to establish the MDMT?
a) the mean value
b) the lowest value
c) the largest value
d) 2/3 of the largest value
Answer: C……...ASME VIII , Design Temperature [UG-20(b)]
=========================================================
148. A hydrostatically tested pressure vessel is made from a P-No. 1, Group 1
material with a design temperature of 350°F, where thermal/mechanical
shock and cyclic loading are not factors. Which of the following would be
exempt from impact testing under this design?
a) 0.750 in. thick material on Curve A
b) 0.750 in. thick material on Curve B
c) 1.125 in. thick material on Curve C
d) 1.250 in. thick material on Curve D
Answer: B……...ASME VIII , Material Exemption to Impact Testing [UG-
20(f)(1)(b)]
=========================================================
149. If non-normalized SA -516 Gr 60 material is used for fabricating a
pressure vessel with a nominal wall thickness of 1.125 inches (28.6 mm) for
what minimum design metal temperature can the vessel be stamped
without impact testing?
A) - 26˚F (-32˚C)
B) 2˚F(-17˚C)
C) 37F(3˚C)
D) 75 F(3˚C)
Answer: B……...ASME VIII , IMPACT TEST EXEMPTION [UCS-66]
=========================================================
150. A pressure vessel shell, fabricated of SA-515 Gr. 60 plate, has a
thickness of 1.125”. PWHT was performed though it was not otherwise
required by Code. The ratio of design stress to allowable stress is 1.0. What
is the lowest minimum design metal temperature that would not require
impact testing?
A) 7°F
B) 37°F
C) 45°F
D) 75°F
Answer: A……...ASME VIII , IMPACT TEST EXEMPTION [UCS-66]

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

151. A pressure vessel shell, fabricated of SA-515 Gr. 70 plate, has a thickness
of 1.125”. PWHT was performed though it was not otherwise required by
Code. The ratio of design stress to allowable stress is 1.0. What is the lowest
minimum design metal temperature that would not require impact testing?
A) 7°F
B) 37°F
C) 45°F
D) 75°F
Answer: c……...ASME VIII , IMPACT TEST EXEMPTION [UCS-66]
=========================================================
152. Regarding ASME B16.5 ferritic steel flanges, what is the lowest MDMT
value that is exempt from impact testing?
A) −20°F (−29°C)
B) -40°F (-40°C)
C) 32°F (0°C)
D) None of these
Answer: A……...ASME VIII , IMPACT TEST EXEMPTION [UCS-66 (c) (1)]
=========================================================
153. A stationary vessel is made from 3 in thick SA516 GR70 plate that has
been normalized. The MDMT is 30 F at 500 psig. Does this material require
impact testing?
(a) No
(b) Yes
(c) Only if the vessel ID is less than 36 in
(d) Only if the vessel ID is greater than 36 in
Answer: ……...ASME VIII , : IMPACT TEST EXEMPTION [UCS-66]
=========================================================
154. A vessel constructed of ‘curve B’ material is to be patch-plated with a
fillet welded patch of the same material as the shell. The stress ratio is
calculated as 0.64. The patch and vessel are 0.625 in thick with zero
corrosion allowance. The MDMT is - 15 F. From the information given, does
the repair require impact testing of the repair procedure?
(a) Yes
(b) No
(c) Yes, if optional PWHT is done
(d) There is insufficient information in the question to dec
Answer: ……...ASME VIII , : : IMPACT TEST EXEMPTION [UCS-66]

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

155. A 1.125 in thick lap-welded patch is of SA-516 Gr 70 P1 material. The
vessel nameplate shows MDMT as 50 F ‘HT’, denoting that the patch has
been voluntarily heat-treated. The stress ratio is 1. From the information
given, does the repair require impact testing of the repair procedure?
(a) Yes
(b) No
(c) Only if the optional PWHT is actually done
(d) There is insufficient information in the question to decide
Answer: ……...ASME VIII , : : IMPACT TEST EXEMPTION [UCS-66]
=========================================================
156. At what temperature would impact testing be required for the following
conditions in a new pressure vessel? A vertical vessel made from SA-516 grade
70, normalized, nominal wall thickness of 1.500 in., that operates at 600°F
with a MAWP of 350 psi., with a WPS that included a 250°F preheat and
PWHT.
a) 14°F
b) -14°F
c) -44°F
d) impact testing is not required?
Answer: C……...ASME VIII , : IMPACT TEST EXEMPTION [UCS-66]
=========================================================
157. A pressure vessel is made from SA-516 grade 60, nominal wall thickness
of 0.750 in., a MSTS of 60 ksi with a coincident ratio of 0.8, that operates at
675°F with a MAWP of 150 psi. What is the MDMT without impact testing,
including all exemptions?
a) -22°F
b) -34°F
c) -5°F
d) -62°F
Answer: C……...ASME VIII , : IMPACT TEST EXEMPTION [UCS-66]
=========================================================
158. { When performing Charpy V-notch impact tests in accordance with ASME
Section VIII, Div.1, which of the following is correct?} / {what is the number
of specimen required in charpy V test in ASME VIII?}
A) The test shall consist of four specimens
B) The test shall consist of three specimens
C) The test shall consist of two specimens
D) The test shall consist of one specimen
Answer: B……...ASME VIII , : Charpy Impact Test Specimen [UG-84(c)(1)]

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

159. What does a low energy value for a notch toughness test indicate?
A) The material is ductile
B) The material is elastic
C) The material is brittle
D) The material is low strength
Answer: C……...ASME VIII , : Charpy Impact Test Specimen [UG-84 / FIG. UG-
84.1]
=========================================================
160. When notch toughness is performed as part of the qualification of a
welding procedure, the test is performed using the:
A) Brinell test
B) Impact test
C) Bend test
D) Tension test
Answer: B……...ASME VIII , : Charpy Impact Test Specimen [UG-84]
=========================================================
161. What are the dimensions of a standard sized Charpy impact test
specimen?
a) 5 mm x 5 mm x 55 mm
b) 5 mm x 10 mm x 55 mm
c) 10 mm x 10 mm x 55 mm
d) 10 mm x 15 mm x 55 mm
Answer: C……...ASME VIII , : Charpy Impact Test Specimen [UG-84(c)(2) and
Fig. UG-84]
=========================================================
162. What is the depth of the notch for a Charpy impact specimen?
a) 2 mm
b) 3 mm
c) 8 mm
d) 10 mm
Answer: A…...ASME VIII , : Charpy Impact Test Specimen [Fig. UG-84]
=========================================================
163. What are the minimum single and average values for a Charpy impact
test specimen using 2 in. thick carbon steel with a minimum specified yield
strength of 36 ksi for a pressure vessel application?
a) minimum single value of 5 ft-lb and average value of 15 ft-lb
b) minimum single value of 10 ft-lb and average value of 15 ft-lb
c) minimum single value of 13 ft-lb and average value of 20 ft-lb
d) minimum single value of 10 ft-lb
and average value of 20 ft-lb
Answer: B…...ASME VIII , : Minimum Absorbed Energy Requirement [Fig. UG-
84 and note (b)]

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

164. What is the Charpy impact test temperature reduction below the
minimum design metal temperature for Table UCS-23 materials having a
specified minimum tensile strength of 70,000 psi (480 MPa) when a 2/3
size specimen is tested?
a) 0°F (0°C)
b) 5°F (3°C)
c) 8°F (4°C)
d) 10°F (6°C)
Answer: D…...ASME VIII , : Charpy Impact Test Temperature [Table UG-84.2]
=========================================================
165. When may subsize samples be used in lieu of a full size impact specimen?
a) for materials that normally have absorbed energy in excess of 75 ft-lbf
b) for materials that normally have absorbed energy in excess of 150 ft-lbf
c) for materials that normally have absorbed energy in excess of 180 ft-lbf
d) for materials that normally have absorbed energy in excess of 200 ft-lbf
Answer: A…...ASME VIII , : Charpy Impact Test [UG-84(c)(2)]
=========================================================
166. What are the minimum single and average values for a Charpy impact
test specimen using 1 in. thick carbon steel with a minimum specified yield
strength of 65 ksi for a pressure vessel application?
a) minimum single value of 5 ft-lb and average value of 15 ft-lb
b) minimum single value of 10 ft-lb and average value of 15 ft-lb
c) minimum single value of 13 ft-lb and average value of 20 ft-lb
d) minimum single value of 10 ft-lb and average value of 20 ft-lb
Answer: C…...ASME VIII , : Charpy Impact Test Temperature [Table UG-84.2]
=========================================================
167. A nozzle is fitted abutting (i.e. set-on) the vessel wall. What is an
acceptable method of attaching it ?
(a) With a full penetration groove weld through the nozzle wall
(b) With a full penetration groove weld through the vessel wall
(c) With a partial penetration groove weld through the nozzle wall
(d) Both (a) and (c) are acceptable
Answer: A…...ASME VIII , : Minimum Requirements for Attachment Welds at
Openings [UW- 16(c) and sketches (a), (b). ]
=========================================================
168. By what means can reinforcement be added to an opening in a
pressure vessel?
(a) By integral reinforcement such as forged inserts
(b) By using separate plates (compensation pads)
(c) By using thicker shell material
(d) All of the above are valid methods

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

Answer: D…...ASME VIII , : Minimum Requirements for Attachment Welds at
Openings [UW- 16(c)]
=========================================================
169. A vessel is manufactured from P1 Grade 2 material. It has a shell
thickness of 18 mm and is used to contain lethal substances. A set-on
(abutting) nozzle of 12 mm thickness is attached using a category D full
penetration weld with reinforcing fillet. What is the minimum required throat
thickness of the reinforcing fillet weld?
(a) 12 mm
(b) 8.4 mm
(c) 6 mm
(d) 12.6 mm
Answer: C…...ASME VIII , : Minimum Requirements for Attachment Welds at
Openings [UW-16(c) figure 16.1(a)]
=========================================================
170. A vessel has a shell thickness of 3/4 in (19 mm). A set-on (abutting)
nozzle of 1/2 in (13 mm) thickness is attached using a category D full
penetration weld. A reinforcing plate of 1/4 in (6 mm) is required. What welds
will be required to attach the reinforcing plate to the nozzle?
(a) A full penetration weld plus a fillet with a 4.2 mm throat
(b) A full penetration weld plus a fillet with a 6 mm throat
(c) A fillet weld with a 3 mm throat
(d) A full penetration weld plus a fillet with a 3 mm throat
Answer: A…...ASME VIII , : Minimum Requirements for Attachment Welds at
Openings [UW-16 (c)(2)(c)]
=========================================================
171. A nozzle of NPS 10 (DN 250) is inserted through a vessel wall and
protrudes into the vessel by an amount equal to the nozzle thickness. The
nozzle thickness is one half of the shell thickness. Which of the following
weld combinations are acceptable to attach the nozzle?
a) Partial penetration groove or fillet weld on inside and outside face
b) Partial penetration groove with reinforcing fillet on outside face
c) Partial penetration groove with reinforcing fillet on inside face
d) Any of the above is acceptable
Answer: A…...ASME VIII , : Minimum Requirements for Attachment Welds at
Openings [UW-16 (d)(1)]
=========================================================
172. What is the outer fillet weld leg size in a nozzle designed to Fig. UW-16.1
(d),where tc is 0.500 in., the nozzle thickness is 0.375 in., and made from
SA-333 grade 6?
a) 0.354 in.
b) 0.495 in.

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

c) 0.595 in.
d) 0.707 in.
Answer: D…...ASME VIII , : Minimum Requirements for Attachment Welds at
Openings [UW-16Fig. UW-16.1 (d)]
=========================================================
173. A nozzle has an opening diameter of 10 inches, and a nominal thickness of
0.375 inch. The vessel shell has a required thickness of 0.75 inch and a
nominal thickness of 0.850 inch. Both the nozzle and the vessel materials are
the same and there is no corrosion allowance on this nozzle. What is the
required area of reinforcement?
A) 3.75 square inches
B) 7.50 square inches
C) 8.50 square inches
D) 11.25 square inches
Answer: B…...ASME VIII , : Minimum Required Area of Replacement [UG-37
and Fig. UG-37.1]
=========================================================
174. A vertical vessel has a 36 in. diameter seamless shell with a required wall
thickness of 0.500 in., made from SA-516 grade 70, as-rolled, with an
allowable stress of 20,000 psi, that operates at 400°F with a MAWP of 350
psi. The inlet nozzle has a diameter of 4.000 inches in the uncorroded
condition and required thickness of 0.375 in. The entire vessel, including all
heads and nozzles, has a corrosion allowance of 0.125 in. What is the total
cross-sectional area of reinforcement required for these conditions?
a) 1.500 in.2
b) 2.000 in.2
c) 2.625 in.2
d) 2.125 in.2
Answer: D…...ASME VIII , : Minimum Required Area of Replacement [UG-37
and Fig. UG-37.1]
=========================================================
175. horizontal pressure vessel with a specified wall thickness of 0.525 in. and
a required wall thickness of 0.350 in., operates at 400°F with a MAWP of 250
psi. The outlet nozzle has a diameter of 6.000 in. with a required thickness of
0.425 in. and a nominal wall thickness of 0.575 in. The nozzle does not pass
through a weld joint. The entire vessel, including shell, heads, nozzles, other
components have a corrosion allowance of 0.125 in.
a) 0.085 in.2
b) 1.050 in.2
c) 0.385 in.2
d) 0.313 in.2

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

Answer: …...ASME VIII , : Required A1 Value for Excess Thickness in the Shell
[UG-37 and Fig. UG-37.1]
=========================================================
176. Calculate the area available for the nozzle projecting outward for the
following conditions. A horizontal pressure vessel with a nominal wall
thickness of 0.525 in. and a required wall thickness of 1.35 in., operates at
400°F with a MAWP of 250 psi. The outlet nozzle has a diameter of 6.000 in.
with a required thickness of 0.425 in. and a nominal wall thickness of 0.575
in. The nozzle does not pass through a weld joint. The entire vessel, including
shell, heads, nozzles, other components have a corrosion allowance of 0.125
in.
a) 0.050 in.2
b) 0.400 in.2
c) 0.450 in.2
d) 0.500 in.2
Answer: A…...ASME VIII , Required A2 Value for Excess Thickness in the
Nozzle [UG-37 and Fig. UG-37.1]
=========================================================
177. During the construction of a pressure vessel outside, what should not be
done if welders and the work are not properly protected?
a) no welding be done when surfaces are wet or covered with ice
b) no welding be done when snow is falling on the surfaces to be welded
c) no welding be done during periods of high wind
d) all of the above
Answer: D…...ASME VIII , Lowest Permissible Temperatures for Welding [UW-
30]
=========================================================
178. During the construction of a pressure vessel, what is the maximum
allowable offset for a shell to hemispherical head weld joint, where the
nominal shell and head thicknesses (t) are 2.00 in. each?
a) 1/4t
b) 1/8t
c) 1/8 in.
d) 3/16 in.
Answer: C…...ASME VIII , Welding Alignment Tolerance [UW-33]
=========================================================
179. Inspector measured undercut on a girth weld during the repair to an
ASME Section VIII, Div. I Carbon Steel vessel (Stamped RT 1) and it was found
to be 1/32 inch (1mm) in depth maximum. Shell base metal is 2 inches thick
and having PWHT. Inspector shall:
A) Reject the weld because no undercut is allowed on any vessel welds
requiring PW

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

B) Reject the weld because undercut will affect RTFI interpretation and
request surface grinding
C) Accept the weld because undercut is within ASME Section VIII, Div. I code
allowed tolerance
D) Consult with the Vessel (Welding) Engineer
Answer: C…...ASME VIII , A reduction in thickness [UW-35 (b)]
=========================================================
180. Inspector measured undercut on a girth weld (No PWHT required) and it
was found to be 1/32 in. (1mm) in depth. Shell material is .350 inches thick
(9mm). Inspector shall:
A) Accept the weld because undercut is within ASME Section VIII, Div. I code
allowed tolerance
B) Reject the weld because undercut will affect RTFI interpretation and
request surface grinding
C) Accept the weld, as 1mm undercut is allowed on non-PWHT’d welds per
ASME VIII, Div 1.
D) Reject the weld because it exceeds the ASME Section VIII, Div. I code
allowed tolerance
Answer: D…...ASME VIII , reduction in thickness [UW-35 (b)]
=========================================================
181. The maximum of set for ¼ inch thick Category A weld joint that is being
repaired is:
A) 1/16 Inch
B) 1/18 Inch
C) 1/16 Inch
D) ¼ inch
Answer: A…...ASME VIII , Welding Alignment Tolerance [UW-33 /Table UW-
33]
=========================================================
182. What is the maximum permitted offset for a repaired ¾” Category B weld
joint?
A) 1/16”
B) 1/8”
C) 3/16”
D) 1/4”
Answer: C…...ASME VIII , Welding Alignment Tolerance [UW-33 /Table UW-
33]
=========================================================
183. What is the maximum thickness of the weld reinforcement on each face
for a welded joint connecting flange to nozzle with a nominal thickness of
0.750 in.?
a) 3/32 in.

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

b) 1/8 in.
c) 5/32 in.
d) 3/16 in.
Answer: D…...ASME VIII , Maximum Weld Reinforcement [UW-35(d)]
=========================================================
184. What shall be done when there is a question regarding the surface
condition of a longitudinal or circumferential butt welded joint in a pressure
vessel when interpreting a radiographic film?
a) the film shall be compared to the actual weld surface for determination of
acceptability
b) the film shall be reviewed by a 2nd qualified examiner
c) the radiograph shall be retaken with an adjusted procedure to
accommodate the circumstance
for the question
d) the film shall be interpreted as best as possible
Answer: A…...ASME VIII , Welded Surface [UW-35(a)]
=========================================================
185. Which of the following are required for finished longitudinal and
circumferential butt welded joints in a pressure vessel?
a) shall have complete penetration
b) shall have full fusion
c) shall have complete penetration and full fusion
d) shall have complete penetration and appropriate fusion for the weld joint
design
Answer: C…...ASME VIII , Welded Surface [UW-35(a)]
=========================================================
186. Although as-welded surfaces are permitted for finished longitudinal and
circumferential butt welded joints in a pressure vessel, what are the
requirements to permit proper interpretation of radiographic and other
required non-destructive examinations?
a) the surface of welds shall be sufficiently free from coarse ripples and
grooves
b) the surface of welds shall be sufficiently free from overlaps and abrupt
ridges
c) the surface of welds shall be sufficiently free from valleys
d) all of the above
Answer: D…...ASME VIII , Welded Surface [UW-35(a)]
=========================================================
187. What may be done to assure that the weld grooves are completely filled
so that the surface of the weld metal at any point does not fall below the
surface of the adjoining base materials?
a) weld metal may be added as reinforcement on outside face of the weld

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

b) weld metal may be added as a cap pass
c) weld metal may be added as reinforcement on each face of the weld
d) base metal may be melted to fill the weld joint sufficiently
Answer: C…...ASME VIII , Welded Surface [UW-35(d)]
=========================================================
188. What is the reason for chipping, grinding, or melting out the reverse side
of double-welded joints during the construction of a pressure vessel before
applying weld metal from the reverse side?
a) to secure sound metal at the base of weld metal first deposited
b) to increase weld metal properties on the reverse side
c) to strengthen the back-pass weldment
d) to improve low temperature impact properties of the back-pass
Answer: A…...ASME VIII , Completing Double-Welded Joints [UW-37(a)]

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

 API 510 2014
1. To qualify to write the API 510 ICP certification examination, what is the
inspection experience requirement for a high school graduate?
a) Three years of experience in inspection of pressure vessels
b) Two years of experience in inspection of pressure vessels, of which one
year must be in supervision of inspection activities or performance of
inspection activities
c) Three years of experience in inspection of pressure vessels, of which one
year must be in supervision of inspection activities or performance of
inspection activities
d) Five years of experience in inspection of pressure vessels, of which two
years must be in supervision of inspection activities or performance of
inspection activities
Answer: C…...API 510 , Inspector Certification [Annex B, B.2. (c) ]
=========================================================
2. For Recertification purpose, as per API 510 "Actively engaged as inspector "
is defined as which of the following
a) Minimum of 20% of time spent on performing or supervision of inspection
activities as per API 510
b) Performance of or supervision of inspection activities on 75 pressure
vessels.
c) Either (a) or (b)
d) Both (a) and (b) are required
Answer: C…...API 510 , Inspector Certification [Annex B, B .3.2 (a) and (b)]
=========================================================
3. Actively engaged inspectors shall demonstrate knowledge of revisions to
API 510____
a) Once every other certification period (every Six years)
b) One every Nine years
c) At the time of each recertification (every three years)
d) There is no such requirement
Answer: A…...API 510 , Inspector Certification [Annex B, B .3.3]
=========================================================
4. What activities does the API 510 pressure vessel inspection code cover?
A) in-service inspection, repair, alterations
B) rerating activities for pressure vessels
C) pressure-relieving devices protecting pressure vessels
D) all of the above
Answer: D…...API 510 , Coverage [1.1.1]
=========================================================
5. API 510 can be applied to which of the following in service vessels.
A) Constructed in accordance with an applicable construction code.
Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam
A) Vessels constructed without a construction code.
A) Non – standard Vessels.
A) All of above
Answer: A…...API 510 , Coverage [1.1.1]
=========================================================
6. As per API 510, a “non-standard vessel” is one that was:
A) Not fabricated to recognized construction codes & meeting no known
recognized standards
B) Not constructed & approved as jurisdictional special based on jurisdiction
acceptance rules
C) Fabricated to a recognized construction code but has lost its nameplate or
stamping
D) Not constructed in accordance with an applicable construction code
Answer: C…...API 510 , Coverage [1.1.1]
=========================================================
7. When a conflict between the ASME VIII Code and the API 510 exists, for in-
service vessels, which code takes precedence?
a) The applicable code determined by the authorized pressure vessel inspector
b) The applicable code determined by the owner/user
c) API-510
d) ASME VIII Code
Answer: C…...API 510 , Coverage [1.1.1]
=========================================================
8. The application of API 510 code is restricted to owner/users that employ or
have access to technically qualified individuals and organizations. Which of
the statements below is correct?
A) Owner/User needs Authorized Inspection Agency, an Inspector, and
Examiners only
B) Owner/User needs Authorized Inspection Agency and an Engineering
Organization only
C) Owner/User needs Authorized Inspection Agency, an Inspector, Examiners,
an Engineer, & Repair Organization.
D) Owner/User needs Authorized Inspection Agency , Engineering
Organization, and a Repair Organization
Answer: C…...API 510 , Intent [1.1.2]
=========================================================
9. The application of API 510 is restricted to owner/users that employ which
of the following?
A) an authorized inspection agency and a repair organization
B) an engineer
C) an inspector and examiners
D) all of the above

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

Answer: D…...API 510 , Intent [1.1.2]
=========================================================
10. Who shall respond to any inspection results that require corrective
actions to assure the continued safe operation of pressure vessels and
pressure relieving devices?
A. Owner/User
B) Authorized Inspection Agency
C) Authorized API Inspector.
D) Repair Organization
Answer: A…...API 510 , Intent [1.1.2]
=========================================================
11. If there is conflict between API 510 rules and prevailing jurisdictional
requirements:
A) API 510 shall prevail over jurisdiction requirements
B )Adoption and use of API 510 does not permit its use.
C) Depends on authorized inspector, which one to adopt
D) Depends on owner / user, which one to adopt
Answer: B…...API 510 , Limitations [1.1.3]
=========================================================
12. Choose correct statement:
A )Adoption and use of API 510 does not permit its use.
B) If requirements of API 510 code are more stringent than requirements of
regulation, then API 510 shall govern.
C) API 510 code is not permitted to be used in conflict with prevailing
regulatory requirements.
D) Either A or B.
Answer: D…...API 510 , Limitations [1.1.3]
=========================================================
13. Which of the following vessels are excluded from the specific requirements
API 510 Code?
A ) cargo or volume tanks for trucks.
B) Vessels with an internal or external design pressure that cannot exceed 15
psig (103.4 KPa).
C)Vessels with an internal or external design pressure that exceed 15 psig
(103.4 KPa).
D) A and B above.
Answer: D…...API 510 , Excluded and Optional Services [1.2.2 /Annex A]
=========================================================
14. Which of the following vessels is included FROM specific requirements API
510 Code?
A ) hot water supply storage tank with water design temperature of 210 °F (99
°C).

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

B) Vessels with an internal or external design pressure that cannot exceed 15
psig (103.4 KPa).
C) hot water supply storage tank with water design temperature of 240 °F
(116 °C).
D) A and B above.
Answer: C…...API 510 , Excluded and Optional Services [1.2.2 /Annex A]
=========================================================
15. Above what pressure is a vessel considered to be in the scope of the API-
510 Code?
A ) 15 psig (103.4 KPa).
B) 20 psi (138 KPa).
C) 30 psig (207 KPa).
D) 75 psig (517 KPa).
Answer: A…...API 510 , Excluded and Optional Services [1.2.2 /Annex A]
=========================================================
16. Which of the following pressure vessels is excluded from the specific
requirements of API-510?
A) Thirty foot diameter off-site normal butane sphere operating at 220psi
B) Ten foot long, one foot diameter truck mounted propane bullet operating at
280psi
C) Eight inch diameter, one foot long cylinder operating at 660psi
D) Four foot long, one and a half foot diameter crude unit compressor gland
condenser shell operating at 300psi
Answer: B…...API 510 , Excluded and Optional Services [1.2.2 /Annex A]
=========================================================
17. Which of the following are excluded from the scope of application of API
510?
A ) Pressure vessels on movable structures covered by other jurisdictional
regulations
B ) All classes of containers listed for exemption from construction in ASME
Section VIII, Div. 1
C ) Pressure vessels which do not exceed volume of the five cubic feet and
pressure of 250 psi
D ) All of the above
Answer: D…...API 510 , Excluded and Optional Services [1.2.2 /Annex A]
=========================================================
18. API 510 code recognizes Technical concepts according to :
A ) API 579 Fitness for service for evaluating in-service damage of pressure
containing components
B ) API 580 Risk based inspection ( RBI) for determining inspection intervals.
C ) It recognizes neither FFS nor RBI
D ) It recognizes both A and B

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

Answer: D…...API 510 , Recognized Technical Concepts [1.3]
=========================================================
19. API 510 recognizes risk-based-inspection concepts for:
A) Evaluating in-service damage using API 510 rules only
B) Evaluating in-service damage using API 579 rules
C) Evaluating in-service damage using API 580 rules
D) None of these are correct
Answer: D…...API 510 , Recognized Technical Concepts [1.3]
=========================================================
20. What documents cover NDT requirements for examiner qualification and
certification?
A) CP-189 Standard and Practice SNT-TC-1A
B) ASNT Practice SNT-TC-1A and ASME Section V Code rules
C) CP-189 Standard and ASME Section V Code rules
D) API 510 rules,CP-189 Standard and Practice SNT-TC-1A & ASME Section V
Code rules
Answer: A…...API 510 , Normative References [2]
=========================================================
21. What term best describes A physical change in any component that has
design implications that affect the pressure-containing capability of a
pressure vessel beyond the scope described in existing data reports.
A. Rerating
B. Repair
C. Alteration
D. Assembly
Answer: C…...API 510 , Alteration [3.1.1]
=========================================================
22. Which of the following are not considered to be alterations?
A) any comparable or duplicate replacement
B) the addition of any reinforced nozzle less than or equal to the size of
existing reinforced nozzles
C) the addition of nozzles not requiring reinforcement
D) all of the above
Answer: D…...API 510 , Alteration [3.1.1]
=========================================================
23. Which of these should be considered an alteration to a pressure vessel per
API 510?
A) Any comparable or duplicate replacement due to severe corrosion or other
reasons
B) Adding a reinforced nozzle (12 NPS or greater) equal to a size of existing
reinforced nozzles

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

C) Addition of any reinforced nozzle greater than the size of existing
reinforced nozzles
D) Addition of small bore nozzles or welded couplings that do not require
reinforcement
Answer: C…...API 510 , Alteration [3.1.1]
=========================================================
24. Which of these should be considered an alteration to a pressure vessel per
API 510?
A) Replacement of a 2:1 Ellipsoidal head due to severe corrosion
B) Replacement of corroded Hemispherical heads with two new 2:1 Ellipsoidal
Heads
C) Replacement of reinforced size 16NPS nozzle neck & flange due to severe
internal corrosion
D) Addition of another reinforced size 18 NPS man way nozzle when 1 already
exists on a vessel
Answer: B…...API 510 , Alteration [3.1.1]
=========================================================
25. The code or standard for which a vessel was originally built to is called
the:
A) Design code
B) Inspection code
C) Construction code
D) Applicable construction code
Answer: C…...API 510 , Construction Code [3.1.7]
=========================================================
26. Whenever the term inspector is used in API 510, it refers to a(n):
A) QA Inspector
B) QC Inspector
C) Examiner
D) None of these
Answer: D…...API 510 , authorized pressure vessel inspector [3.1.5]
=========================================================
27. Person who assists an inspector by performing specific NDE on pressure
vessels but does not evaluate exam results per API 510 unless trained and
authorized to do so by owner/user:
A) QA Inspector
B) QC Inspector
C) Examiner
D) None of these
Answer: C…...API 510 , Examiner [3.1.21]

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

28. Designated areas on pressure vessels where periodic exams are conducted
are called:
A) Examination points
B) Thickness measurement points
C) Inspection points
D) None of these are correct
Answer: D…...API 510 , Condition Monitoring Locations CMLs [3.1.6]
=========================================================
29. Any welding technique used to obtain controlled grain refinement and
tempering of the underlying heat affected zone (HAZ) in the base metal is
called:
A) Controlled-deposition welding
B) Temper-bead welding
C) Half-bead welding
D) None of these is correct
Answer: A…...API 510 , controlled-deposition welding CDW [3.1.8]
=========================================================
30. In the half-bead welding technique, the term “half-bead” refers to the fact
that:
A) The weld shall be deposited with stringer beads and is half the width of a
normal weld bead
B) All welded layers must be ground down after being deposited (removal of
half of all layers)
C) The thickness of the first weld layer deposited must be reduced by one-half
by grinding
D) The thickness of the final weld layer deposited must be reduced by one-half
by grinding
Answer: C…...API 510 , controlled-deposition welding CDW [3.1.8]
=========================================================
31. A methodology whereby flaws and conditions contained within an
equipment item are assessed in order to determine the integrity of the
equipment for continued service is called:
A) Risk-based Inspection Assessment
B) Fitness-for-service evaluation
C) Nondestructive examination
D) In-Service Inspection assessment
Answer: B…...API 510 , Fitness-For-Service (FFS) evaluation [3.1.23]
=========================================================
32. Type of assessment & management process that is focused on inspection
planning for loss of containment of pressurized equipment in process
facilities due to material deterioration is:
A) Inspection Plan

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

B) Fitness-for-Service
C) Risk-based Inspection
D) Quality Assurance
Answer: B…...API 510, Fitness-For-Service (FFS) evaluation [3.1.23]
=========================================================
33. A point in the repair or alteration process beyond which work may not
proceed until the required inspection or NDE has been performed and
documented is called a(n):
A) Hold Point
B) Witness Point
C) Inspection Point
D) Examination Point
Answer: A…...API 510, Hold Point [3.1.26]
=========================================================
34. A response or evidence resulting from the application of a Nondestructive
exam is called:
A) Indication
B) Imperfection
C) Discontinuity
D) Defect
Answer: A…...API 510, Indications [3.1.28]
=========================================================
35. A strategy defining how and when a pressure vessel or pressure-relieving
device will be repaired, inspected, and/or maintained is called a(n):
A) Repair Plan
B) Inspection Plan
C) Quality Plan
D) QA Inspection/Repair management System
Answer: B…...API 510, Inspection Plan [3.1.35]
=========================================================
36. This type of pressure is based upon calculations using the minimum (or
average pitted) thickness for all critical vessel elements and is exclusive of
the corrosion allowance and may be adjusted for static head pressure and
other loads such as wind and earthquakes:
A) MAWP
B) Design Pressure
C) MAOP
D) MDMT
Answer: A…...API 510, Maximum Allowable Working Pressure MAWP [3.1.44]

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

37. When a vessel is nearing its minimum allowed thickness, a permissible
way to provide for additional corrosion allowance without using a repair
organization is to:
A) Derate a vessel below original design conditions
B) Perform an alteration on the vessel and change the original design
conditions
C) Rerate a vessel above the original design conditions
D) Repair a vessel to restore the original design conditions
Answer: A…...API 510, Rerating [3.1.64]
=========================================================
38. A repair organization may be any one of the following EXCEPT:
A) Holder of a valid ASME Certificate of Authorization (U-stamp)
B) Holder of a valid ASME Certificate of Authorization (R-stamp)
C) Owner/User of pressure vessels who repairs his own equipment
D) An individual or organization that is authorized by the legal jurisdiction
Answer: B…...API 510, Repair Organization [3.1.62]
=========================================================
39. Required thickness is defined by API 510 as the minimum thickness for
each element of a pressure vessel based on the appropriate design code
calculations and code allowable stress that considers all of the following
factors EXCEPT:
A) Pressure
B) Mechanical loadings
C) Structural loadings
D) Corrosion Allowance
Answer: D…...API 510, Required Thickness [3.1.63]
=========================================================
40. Temper Embrittlement affects which low alloys and occurs in what
temperature range?
A) Temper Embrittlement affects 1.25Cr-0.5Mo alloy steels in the 650ºF –
1100ºF (345ºC – 595ºC) temperature range
B) Temper Embrittlement affects 2.25Cr-1.0Mo alloy steels in the 650ºF –
1100ºF (345ºC – 595ºC) temperature range
C) Temper Embrittlement affects 1.25Cr-0.5Mo alloy steels in the 750ºF –
1100ºF (400ºC – 595ºC) temperature range
D) Temper Embrittlement affects 2.25Cr-1.0Mo alloy steels in the 750ºF –
1100ºF (400ºC – 595ºC) temperature range
Answer: B…...API 510, Temper Embrittlement [3.1.69]
=========================================================
41. The “transition temperature” as defined by API 510 is the:
A) Temperature at which a material’s modulus of elasticity changes

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

B) Temperature at which a material fracture mode changes from ductile to
brittle
C) Temperature at which a material undergoes chemical and metallurgical
changes
D) Temperatures of 1200°F and 1500°F, respectively, that are identified as
limits for PWHT
Answer: B…...API 510, Transition Temperature [3.1.73]
=========================================================
42. Which of these is an inspection organization as recognized by the API 510
code?
A) Inspection organization of a jurisdiction from outside of a jurisdiction
where a pressure vessel is used
B) Inspection organization of an insurance company that did not insure a
given pressure vessel
C) Owner or User who maintains an inspection organization for his own
equipment
D) Independent outside contractor hired by an owner or user that is
recognized by a jurisdiction
Answer: C…...API 510, Authorized Inspection Agency [3.1.4]
=========================================================
43. What is a repair?
A) the work necessary to restore a vessel to a condition suitable for safe
operation at the design conditions
B) a physical change in any component that has design implications that affect
the pressure-containing capability of a pressure vessel beyond the scope
described in existing data reports
C) a change in either the design temperature rating, the MDMT or the MAWP
rating of a vessel
D) a physical change in any component that has design implications that
affect the pressure-containing capability of a pressure vessel beyond the
scope described in existing data reports
Answer: A…...API 510, Repair [3.1.61]
=========================================================
44. What shall an inspector do if during a maintenance repair the changes
results in a higher MAWP?
A) the repair shall be considered an alteration and the requirements for
rerating shall be satisfied
B) the repair shall be evaluated in consultation with an engineer to determine
if rerating is required
C) the repair shall be evaluated in consultation with an engineer or corrosion
specialist, depending on the type of repair, to determine if rerating is
required

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

D) the repair is deemed a temporary repair and must be removed and replaced
at the next scheduled shutdown
Answer: A…...API 510, Alteration/ Repair [3.1.1 / 3.1.61]
=========================================================
45. An inspector notices that a welder does some maintenance cutting,
grinding, and welding on a pressure vessel where no design implications that
affect the pressure containing capability of the pressure vessel beyond the
scope described in existing data reports occurs. How should the inspector
document this work?
A) as an alteration
B) as an alteration that requires rerating
C) as a repair
D) as a temporary repair
Answer: C…...API 510, Alteration/ Repair [ [3.1.1 / 3.1.61]
=========================================================
46. When a repair is made to pressure vessels to restore sufficient integrity
for temporary continued safe operation, how long may this repair stay in
place before a permanent repair is performed?
A) up to 6 months
B) up to 1 year
C) until the next scheduled shutdown or 1 year, whichever is less
D) until permanent repairs can be conducted
Answer: D…...API 510, Temporary Repairs [3.1.70]
=========================================================
47. When a jurisdiction has an inspection organization where pressure vessels
are used, what can it also be referred to as being?
A) an authorized inspection agency
B) an inspection agency
C) a registered inspection agency
D) all of the above
Answer: A…...API 510, Authorized Inspection Agency [3.1.4]
=========================================================
48. In simple terms, MAWP means much the same as?
A) 90 % design pressure
B) 150 % design pressure
C) Design pressure
D) Hydraulic test pressure
Answer: C…...API 510, Maximum Allowable Working Pressure MAWP [3.1.44]
=========================================================
49. At what position is MAWP calculated for in a vertical pressure vessel?
A) At the bottom of the vessel
B) At the top of the vessel

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

C) Halfway up the vessel
D) At the pressure gauge position, wherever it happens to be
Answer: B…...API 510, Maximum Allowable Working Pressure MAWP [3.1.44]
=========================================================
50. A pitted vessel is measured at an average of 10 mm thick and has a
‘designed’ corrosion allowance of 1.6 mm. It is now installed in a corrosion-
free environment. What thickness is used when calculating the MAWP?
A) 13.2 mm
B) 11.6 mm
C) 10 mm
D) 8.4 mm
Answer: D…...API 510, Maximum Allowable Working Pressure MAWP [3.1.44]
=========================================================
51. According to API 510, authorized inspection agency is?
A) Jurisdiction organization
B) Inspection organization of Insurance company which under writes
insurance of pressure vessels
C) Inspection organization of owner-user
D) Any of above
Answer: D…...API 510, Authorized Inspection Agency [3.1.4]
=========================================================
52. An imperfection of a type or magnitude exceeding the acceptance criteria
is known as which of the following?
A) Discontinuity
B) Flaw
C) Defect
D) Indication
Answer: C…...API 510, Defect [3.1.15]
=========================================================
53. Flaws or other discontinuities noted during inspection or examination
that may or may not exceed the applicable acceptance criteria is known as
which of the following?
A) Discontinuity
B) imperfection
C) Defect
D) Indication
Answer: B…...API 510, Imperfection [3.1.27]
=========================================================
54. Which of the following is The lowest permissible metal temperature for a
given material at a specified thickness based on its resistance to brittle
fracture?
A) minimum design metal temperature(MDMT)

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

B) minimum allowable temperature (MAT)
C) maximum allowable working pressure (MAWP)
D) A or B
Answer: …...API 510, Minimum Design Metal Temperature/Minimum
Allowable Temperature MDMT/MAT [3.1.45]
=========================================================
55. A risk assessment and management process that is focused on ?
A) inspection planning for loss of containment of pressurized equipment in
processing facilities, due to material deterioration
B) Material deterioration
C) probability of failure
D) Consequence of failure
Answer: A…...API 510, Risk-based inspection [3.1.65]
=========================================================
56. Which of the following best defines “temper Embrittlement”?
A) Brittleness due to low temperature operation
B) Brittleness due to Hydrogen Sulphide attack at high temperatures
(exceeding 700 °F)
C) The reduction in toughness due to a metallurgical change as a result of
long-term exposure in the temperature range of about 650 °F to 1100 °F
D) None of above.
Answer: C…...API 510, Temper Embrittlement [3.1.69]
=========================================================
57. The temperature used for the design of the pressure vessel per the
applicable construction code is known as which of the following?
A) Design Temperature
B) Minimum Design Metal Temperature (MDMT)
C) Minimum Allowable Temperature (MAT)
D) Temper embrittlement
Answer: A…...API 510, Design Temperature [3.1.16]
=========================================================
58. A change in either the design temperature rating, the MDMT or the MAWP
rating of a vessel is known as which of the following?
A) Rerating
B) Repair
C) Alteration
D) major repair
Answer: A…...API 510 Rerating [3.1.64]
=========================================================
59. A pressure vessel is equipped with an NPS 10 reinforced nozzle. Which of
the following would be considered an alteration to the vessel?
A) Adding a twelve inch reinforced nozzle

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

B) Adding a ten inch reinforced nozzle
C) Adding a nozzle that does not require reinforcement
D) Adding a nozzle of any size less than NPS 10
Answer: A…...API 510, Alteration [3.1.1]
=========================================================
60. Which of the following is not an acceptable API-510 repair organization?
A) ASME “S” Stamp holder
B) Contractor chosen by the owner/operator
C) ASME “U” Stamp holder
D) Owner/user shop
Answer: A…...API 510, Repair organization [3.1.62]
=========================================================
61. Which of the following is an alteration according to API-510?
A) The addition of nozzles not requiring reinforcement or re-rating
B) Any comparable or duplicate replacement
C) Any design change affecting the pressure containing capability of a
pressure vessel
D) The addition of a reinforced nozzle equal to or less than the size of an
existing reinforced nozzle
Answer: C…...API 510, Alteration [3.1.1]
=========================================================
62. Increasing the MAWP and/or the temperature of a pressure vessel, or
decreasing the temperature such that Charpy impact testing will be required
is considered which of the following?
A) A modification
B) Rerating
C) An alteration
D) A repair
Answer: B…...API 510, Rerating [3.1.64]
=========================================================
63. A change in design temperature that requires additional mechanical tests
is:
A) Considered a test procedure
B) Not permitted
C) Considered a repair
D) Considered an alteration
Answer: D…...API 510, Rerating [3.1.64]
=========================================================
64. Owner/user quality assurance inspection/repair management system
contains all these EXCEPT:
A) Organization and reporting structure for inspection personnel
B) Documenting of inspection and quality assurance procedures

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

C) Documenting and reporting inspection and test results
D) Developing and documenting repair plans
Answer: D…...API 510, Owner/User Systems and Procedures [4.1.2]
=========================================================
65. Who is responsible to owner/user for activities involving design, analysis,
or evaluation of pressure vessels and pressure-relieving devices covered by
the API 510 code?
A) Authorized Inspection Agency
B) Authorized Pressure Vessel Inspector
C) Corrosion Specialist
D) None of these are correct
Answer: D…...API 510, Engineer Responsibilities [4.2 ]
=========================================================
66. Who is responsible to the owner/user to assure that the inspection, NDE,
and pressure testing activities meet API 510 requirements?
A) Authorized Inspection Agency
B) Authorized Pressure Vessel Inspector
C) Examiner
D) Repair Organization
Answer: B…...API 510, Inspector Responsibilities [4.4 ]
=========================================================
67. In order to maintain and repair vessels or pressure-relieving device in
accordance with the requirements of API 510 code, the repair organization is
responsible to the owner/user and shall provide all of the following items
EXCEPT:
A) materials
B) workmanship
C) equipment
D) quality assurance
Answer: D…...API 510, Repair Organization Responsibilities [4.3]
=========================================================
68. Inspectors may be assisted in performing inspections by other properly
trained and qualified individuals who are not inspectors. These are called:
A) Certified welding inspectors and NDE technicians
B) Operating Personnel and NDE technicians
C) Examiners and Operating personnel
D) Examiners only are allowed
Answer: B…...API 510, Inspector / Other Personnel Responsibilities [4.4/ 4.6 ]
=========================================================
69. All NDE results must be evaluated and accepted by the:
A) Certified welding inspectors and NDE technicians doing the examinations
B) NDE technicians doing the work in assistance to the inspector

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

C) Examiners doing the work in assistance to the inspector
D) None of these is correct
Answer: D…...API 510, Inspector Responsibilities [4.4]
=========================================================
70. Regarding examiner responsibilities, which of the following is not a true
statement?
A) He must be proven competent by owner/users & must hold certs in all NDE
procedures used
B) He shall perform the NDE in accordance with job requirements
C) He does not need 510 certification and does not need to be an employee of
the owner/user
D) He needs to be trained & competent in the NDE procedures being used
Answer: A…...API 510, Examiners Responsibilities [4.5]
=========================================================
71. Who shall maintain certification records of examiners employed, including
dates and results of personnel qualifications (that shall be made available to
the inspector)?
A) Owner/user
B) Examiner’s employer
C) Authorized Inspection Agency
D) Authorized Pressure Vessel Inspector
Answer: C…...API 510, Inspector Responsibilities [4.4]
=========================================================
72. Who is responsible to execute the API 510 inspection plan including the
established schedule?
A) the inspector
B) the owner/user
C) the engineer
D) the repair organization
Answer: B…...API 510, Owner/User Responsibilities [4.1.1]
=========================================================
73. Who is responsible for the function of an Authorized Inspection Agency in
accordance with the provisions of API 510?
A) the inspector
B) the owner/user
C) the engineer
D) the repair organization
Answer: B…...API 510, Owner/User Responsibilities [4.1.1]

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

74. Who is developing, documenting, implementing, executing, and assessing
inspection systems and inspection/repair procedures that meet the
requirements of API 510 ?
A) the inspector
B) the owner/user
C) the engineer
D) the repair organization
Answer: B…...API 510, Owner/User Responsibilities [4.1.2]
=========================================================
75. Who is provide the materials, equipment, QC, and workmanship that is
necessary to maintained repair the in accordance with the requirements of
API 510 ?
A) the inspector
B) the owner/user
C) the engineer
D) the repair organization
Answer: D…...API 510, Repair Organization Responsibilities [4.3]
=========================================================
76. Which of the following is required to be in the quality assurance
inspection/repair
management system?
A) developing and documenting inspection plans
B) developing and documenting process flow diagrams
C) maintaining process flow diagrams
D) all of the above
Answer: A…...API 510, Owner/User Systems and Procedures [4.1.2]
=========================================================
77. If an examiner is trained and competent in an NDE procedure to be used
for API 510 examination, may the examiner perform the NDE work?
A) yes, provided the examiner is certified to ASNT SNT-TC-1A
B) yes, provided the examiner is certified to ASNT CP-189
C) yes, provided the examiner is certified to AWS Welding Inspector
D) yes, provided the owner/user allows the examiner to prove their
competency by holding certification in the procedure
Answer: D…...API 510, Examiner Responsibilities [4.5]
=========================================================
78. During the repair of a pressure vessel, who is ultimately responsible for
compliance with the requirements of API 510?
A) The API-certified inspector
B) The owner/user
C) The repair contractor
D) It absolutely depends on the contractual arrangements in force

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

Answer: B…...API 510, Owner/User Responsibilities [4.1.2]
=========================================================
79. The inspection plan should be developed by the:
A) Authorized Inspection agency
B) Inspector or Engineer
C) Owner/User
D) Engineer only
Answer: B…...API 510, Development of an Inspection Plan [[Link]]
=========================================================
80. What type of inspection function shall be established for all pressure
vessels and pressure-relieving devices within the scope API 510?
A) a QA plan
B) a QC plan
C) an inspection plan
D) an NDE plan
Answer: C…...API 510, Inspection Plans [5.1.1]
=========================================================
81. Corrosion specialist shall be consulted when developing the inspection
plan for vessels that operate at elevated temperatures above:
A) 650 ºF (345 ºC)
B) 700 ºF(371ºC)
C) 750 ºF (400 ºC)
D) 800 ºF (427 ºC)
Answer: C…...API 510, Development of an Inspection Plan [[Link]]
=========================================================
82. What is required to be considered for API 510 examinations during
scheduled intervals?
A) type of damage
B) rate of damage progression
C) tolerance of the equipment to the type of damage
D) all of the above
Answer: D…...API 510, Development of an Inspection Plan [[Link]]
=========================================================
83. When shall inspection plans be reviewed and amended?
A) annually, for each damage mechanism and/or deterioration rate that was
previously identified
B) at each half-life period or 10 years, whichever is less, for each damage
mechanism and/or deterioration rate that was previously identified
C) at each scheduled maintenance shutdown, for each damage mechanism
and/or deterioration rate that was previously identified
D) as needed when variables that may impact damage mechanisms and/or
deterioration rates are identified

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

Answer: D…...API 510, Development of an Inspection Plan [[Link]]
=========================================================
84. Which of the following shall an API 510 inspection plan contain?
A) define the types of inspection needed
B) identify the next inspection date for each inspection type
C) describe the inspection and NDE techniques
D) all of the above
Answer: D…...API 510, Development of an Inspection Plan [5.1.3]
=========================================================
85. RBI can be used to determine:
A) Inspection intervals only
B) Inspection intervals and the type of future inspections required only
C) Inspection intervals and the type and extent of future inspections only
D) Inspection intervals and the type and extent of future inspections and
examinations
Answer: D…...API 510, Risk-Based Inspection (RBI) / General [5.2.1]
=========================================================
86. A RBI assessment determines risk by combining-------------
A) the probability equipment failure
B) the consequence of equipment failure.
C) COF.
D) the probability and the consequence of equipment failure.
Answer: D…...API 510, Risk-Based Inspection (RBI) / General [5.2.1]
=========================================================
87. The probability assessment (probability of failure) shall be based on…….
A) internal or external metal loss from localized or general corrosion
B) all forms of cracking
C) fatigue, embrittlement, or creep
D) all forms of damage (failure) that could reasonably be expected to affect a
vessel in any particular service.
Answer: D…...API 510, Risk-Based Inspection (RBI) / Probability Assessment
[5.2.2]
=========================================================
88. The consequence of failure is dependent on ------------
A) internal or external metal loss from localized or general corrosion
B) all forms of cracking
C) fatigue, embrittlement, or creep
D) type and amount of process fluid contained in the equipment
Answer: D…...API 510, Risk-Based Inspection (RBI) / Consequence Assessment
[5.2.3]

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

89. After an RBI assessment is conducted, the results can be used to establish
the:
A) Most appropriate inspection and NDE methods, tools, and techniques
B) Extent of NDE and the interval for internal, external, and on-stream
inspections
C) Need for pressure testing after damage has occurred or after
repairs/alterations are done
D) Vessel inspection plan
Answer: D…...API 510, Risk-Based Inspection (RBI)/Documentation [5.2.4]
=========================================================
90. When RBI assessments are used to set vessel inspection intervals,
assessments shall be:
A) Documented one time and shall remain on file for the life of the vessel per
API 580
B) Updated after each vessel inspection as defined in API 580
C) Updated only when the vessel inspection interval will be changed as per
API 580
D) Updated after any a vessel undergoes any process change as per API 580
Answer: B…...API 510, Frequency of RBI Assessments [5.2.5]
=========================================================
91. When an owner/user chooses to conduct a RBI assessment, what can RBI
be used to
determine?
A) the inspection intervals
B) the risk by combining the probability and the consequence of equipment
failure
C) extent of future inspection and examinations
D) all of the above
Answer: D…...API 510, Risk-Based Inspection (RBI) / General [5.2.1]
=========================================================
92. Which of the following is not an example for probability assessment of
damage mechanisms for API 510 equipment?
A) internal or external metal loss from localized or general corrosion
B) all forms of cracking
C) fatigue, embrittlement, or creep
D) NDE method selection
Answer: D…...API 510, Risk-Based Inspection (RBI) / Probability Assessment
[5.2.2]

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

93. What type of assessment can an inspector perform to establish a pressure
vessel inspection plan and better define the most appropriate inspection and
NDE methods, tools, and techniques?
A) an RBI assessment
B) a fitness-for-service assessment
C) a probability assessment
D) a consequence assessment
Answer: A…...API 510, Risk-Based Inspection (RBI) / Probability Assessment
[5.2.2]
=========================================================
94. The essential that all RBI assessments documented in Accordance with API
580, Section 17 and ………..
A) clearly defining all the factors contributing to the probability of a failure of
the vessel.
B) clearly defining all the factors contributing to consequence of a failure of
the vessel.
C) clearly defining all the factors contributing to either the probability and
consequence of a failure of the vessel.
D) clearly defining all the factors contributing to both the probability and
consequence of a failure of the vessel
Answer: A…...API 510, Risk-Based Inspection (RBI)/Documentation [5.2.4]
=========================================================
95. Before entering into a vessel for inspection the vessel shall be evaluated
for safety I accordance to ?
A) Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)
B) API
C) ASME/API
D) ANSI
Answer: A…...API 510, Preparation for Inspection / General [5.3.1]
=========================================================
96. Safety precautions are important in pressure vessel inspection and
maintenance activities and regulations govern many aspects of vessel entry
and must be followed. In addition, the:
A) Safety requirements of OSHA regarding confined space rules apply to API
510 inspections
B) Owner/user’s safety procedures must be reviewed and followed in all cases
C) Vessel Inspection Plan must detail any confined space entry requirements
D) None of these are correct
Answer: B…...API 510, Preparation for Inspection / General [5.3.1]

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

97. Before starting any vessel inspection and maintenance activities personnel
should obtain permission to work from--------
A) operating personnel responsible for the pressure vessel.
A) inspector
C) engineer
D) repair organization
Answer: A…...API 510, Preparation for Inspection / Communication [5.3.3]
=========================================================
98. Which the following is the best communication practice when the
Inspectors are inside a vessel for inspection and maintenance activities ?
A) all persons working around the vessel should be informed that people are
working inside the vessel.
B) Individuals working inside the vessel should be informed when any work is
going to be done on the interior or exterior of the vessel while they are
inside the vessel.
C) A and B above
D) None of the above
Answer: C…...API 510, Preparation for Inspection / Communication [5.3.3]
=========================================================
99. Prior to entering a vessel for inspection, how should the vessel be
prepared?
A) drained and purged
B) cleaned and ventilated
C) gas tested
D) all of the above
Answer: D…...API 510, Preparation for Inspection / Vessel Entry [5.3.4]
=========================================================
100. Prior to entering a vessel for inspection, what sources shall be isolated
for safety ?
A) liquids and gases
B) all vapors
C) radiation and electricity
D) all of the above
Answer: D…...API 510, Preparation for Inspection / Vessel Entry [5.3.4]
=========================================================
101. Before carrying out inspection and maintenance activities on a vessel
inservice for quite some time what the inspector should do first ?
A) Check the material in which it is constructed
B) Check the fabrication data of the vessel
C) Check the history file of the vessel
D) Check with the operation.
Answer: C…...API 510, Preparation for Inspection / Records Review [5.3.5]

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

102. Before performing any of the required API 510 inspections, inspectors
shall familiarize themselves with prior history of the vessel and should
review the pressure vessel’s:
A) Prior inspection results and repairs, current inspection plan, and similar
service inspection results
B) Prior inspection and repair results, prior inspection plans & similar service
inspection results
C) Prior inspection and repair results, and prior inspection plans only
D) Prior inspection and repair results only
Answer: A…...API 510, Preparation for Inspection / Records Review [5.3.5]
=========================================================
103. Which of the following damage mechanisms will result in general or local
metal loss?
A) naphthenic acid corrosion
B) fatigue
C) caustic stress corrosion cracking
D) sulfide stress corrosion cracking
Answer: A…...API 510, Inspection for Different Types of Damage Mechanisms
and Failure Modes [5.4.1]
=========================================================
104. Which of the following damage mechanisms will result in metallurgical
changes?
A) high temperature hydrogen attack
B) graphitization
C) hydrogen blistering
D) all of the above
Answer: B…...API 510, Inspection for Different Types of Damage Mechanisms
and Failure Modes [5.4.1]
=========================================================
105. Pressure vessels are susceptible to various types of damage mechanisms.
The various types of damage mechanisms include all of the following EXCEPT:
A) Isolated and local metal loss and Blistering
B) Surface connected cracking and subsurface cracking
C) Metallurgical changes and material property changes
D) Dimensional changes and Microfissuring/microvoid formation
Answer: A…...API 510, Inspection for Different Types of Damage Mechanisms
and Failure Modes [5.4.1]
=========================================================
106. Inspectors should know what specific detailed information concerning
the many common damage mechanisms (DMs) that can be found in:
A) API 572 includes the most important DMs, such as CUI and general and
localized metal loss

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

B) API 571 includes critical factors, affected equipment, and appearance for
each DM.
C) API 571 includes critical factors, appearance and typical inspection and
monitoring techniques for each DM.
D) API 571 includes critical factors, prevention and mitigation, and affected
equipment for each DM.
Answer: C…...API 510, Inspection for Different Types of Damage Mechanisms
and Failure Modes [5.4.2/ 5.4.3]
=========================================================
107. Which of the following considerations should be evaluated where
applicable for vessels in cyclic service?
A) The fatigue design criteria from the original code of construction
B) The types of vessel internal and external attachments and nozzles
C) The potential for internal or external corrosion and environmental/stress
corrosion cracking and their potential effect on the fatigue life of the
vessel.
D) The appropriate NDE and inspection frequency to detect fatigue cracking
E) all of the above
Answer: E…...API 510, Inspection for Different Types of Damage Mechanisms
and Failure Modes [5.4.4]
=========================================================
108. While inspecting an operating vessel you observe that cracks are present
in the connecting welds for fillet welded attachments and nozzle reinforcing
pads, you also notice vibrations are occurring in the assembly. Before you
recommend corrective actions you should?
A) Re-evaluate the materials used in the fabrication of the gauge glass.
B) Write a report of the location with a recommendation for the type of
repairs needed.
C) Research the inspection records for previous failures of this type.
D) Check with a pressure vessel engineer to see if the cracks are caused by
fatigue failure.
Answer: D…...API 510, Inspection for Different Types of Damage Mechanisms
and Failure Modes [5.4.4]
=========================================================
109. While inspecting an Inspector observe that pressure vessel gauge glass
vibrating . Before you recommend corrective actions you should?
A) Re-evaluate the materials used in the fabrication of the gauge glass.
B) Write a report of the location with a recommendation for the type of
repairs needed.
C) Research the inspection records for previous failures of this type.
D) consultant with a pressure vessel engineer.

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

Answer: D…...API 510, Inspection for Different Types of Damage Mechanisms
and Failure Modes [5.4.4]
=========================================================
110. What is a primary goal of the internal inspection ?
A) to check for corrosion scaling
B) to find damage that cannot be found by regular monitoring of external
CMLs
C) to find damage that cannot be found by materials testing
D) to find damage that cannot be found by regular NDE methods
Answer: B…...API 510, Pressure Vessel Internal Inspection [[Link]]
=========================================================
111. The internal inspection shall be performed by:
A) An inspector in accordance with the inspection plan
B) An inspector in accordance with the owner/user quality manual
C) An examiner acceptable to the inspector in accordance with quality manual
D) An inspector in accordance with the detailed procedures of the Authorized
Inspection agency
Answer: A…...API 510, Pressure Vessel Internal Inspection [[Link]]
=========================================================
112. Equipment not designed for entrance by personnel:
A) Only receive external visual inspections
B) Only receive ultrasonic thickness measurements
C) Require no inspection at all
D) Inspection ports shall be opened
Answer: D…...API 510, Pressure Vessel Internal Inspection [[Link]]
=========================================================
113. Vessel internals need not be removed completely as long as reasonable
assurance exists that damage at vessel areas covered by the internals is:
A) Occurring to an extent that is not greater than that found in more
accessible vessel areas
B) Occurring to an extent that is not lesser than that found in more accessible
vessel areas
C) Occurring to an extent that is considered negligible or insignificant by the
Inspector
D) None of these is correct
Answer: A…...API 510, Pressure Vessel Internal Inspection [[Link]]
=========================================================
114. Internal inspection reveals a convex bulge on a seamless ellipsoidal head
where the metal has pulled into the vessel between the head to shell weld and
the knuckle of the head. Of the following, which would be the most likely
recommendation?
A) Determine the extent of the bulge or blister

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

B) Replace the head
C) Ventilate the bulged area
D) Pressure test the vessel
Answer: A…...API 510, Pressure Vessel Internal Inspection [[Link]]
=========================================================
115. Which of the following is a true statement regarding vessels equipped
with removable internals?
A) Internals need not be removed provided reasonable assurance exists that
there is no damage behind them
B) All internals must always be removed for thorough examination of the base
material behind them
C) One fourth of the internals must be removed to determine probable damage
behind them
D) One half of the internals must be removed to determine probable damage
behind them
Answer: A…...API 510, Pressure Vessel Internal Inspection [[Link]]
116. When is it necessary to remove internal linings of a vessel during an
internal inspection?
A) if the lining appears damaged, bulged or cracked, it may be advisable to
remove small portions of the linings to investigate the condition of the
lining and the vessel surface beneath
B) at the inspector's discretion, only after performing 100% external NDE to
explore for damage beneath linings
C) at the inspector's discretion, only after removing 1% of the linings to
investigate the condition of the lining and the vessel surface beneath
D) at the inspector's discretion, only after removing 5% of the linings to
investigate the condition of the lining and the vessel surface beneath
Answer: A…...API 510, Pressure Vessel Internal Inspection [[Link]]
=========================================================
117. If internal linings are in good condition and there is no reason to suspect
that damage is occurring behind them, what does API 510 state?
A) Only spot exams need to be done so that there is reasonable assurance no
damage exists
B) It not necessary to remove linings during the internal inspection
C) Extent and examination percentage beneath linings must be as stated in
the Inspection Plan
D) It is left to the discretion of the Authorized Pressure Vessel inspector and
Corrosion Specialis
Answer: B…...API 510, Pressure Vessel Internal Inspection [[Link]]

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

118. If the lining appears damaged, bulged or cracked, it may be advisable to
do all of the following EXCEPT:
A) Completely remove damaged, bulged & cracked linings for inspection of
vessel beneath
B) Remove small portions of linings & investigate lining condition (Consult
Corrosion Specialist)
C) Remove small portions of linings & investigate vessel surfaces below
(Consult Corr. Specialist)
D) Perform external NDE techniques to explore for vessel damage beneath
internal linings
Answer: A…...API 510, Pressure Vessel Internal Inspection [[Link]]
=========================================================
119. All on-stream examinations should be conducted by?
A) An Inspector only
B) Either an inspector or examiner
C) An inspector approved Examiner
D) An owner/user approved and trained examiner
Answer: B…...API 510, On-stream Inspection of Pressure Vessels [[Link]]
=========================================================
120. Which of the following statements are regarding On-Stream Inspections?
A) Inspections may include several NDE techniques to check for various types
of damage
B) An external inspection may be a part of an on-stream inspection
C) Techniques are chosen for ability to identify internal damage mechanisms
from the exterior
D) Techniques are chosen for capabilities to perform at on-stream conditions
(e.g. metal temps)
Answer: B…...API 510, On-stream Inspection of Pressure Vessels [[Link]]
=========================================================
121. On stream-inspection are conducted to check for
A) check the condition of the outside surface of the vessel, insulation systems,
B) painting and coating systems, supports, and associated structure
C) assessing potential damage due to process & operational changes
D) monitoring corrosion rate.
E) B and C above
Answer: E…...API 510, On-stream Inspection of Pressure Vessels [[Link]
/[Link] ]
=========================================================
122. “On stream-inspection” means inspection carried out
A) Only when a vessel is in operation
B) Only when a vessel is not in operation
C) From outside and vessel may or may not be in operation

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

D) “On-stream inspection” is same as “external inspection”
Answer: C…...API 510, On-stream Inspection of Pressure Vessels [[Link] /
3.1.48]
=========================================================
123. Who should perform external inspections of a pressure vessel that is out-
of service?
A) an inspector
B) an examiner
C) either an inspector or examiner
D) operating personnel
Answer: A…...API 510, External Inspection of Pressure Vessels [[Link].1]
=========================================================
124. During the external inspection, particular attention should be given to:
A) Welded attachments such as reinforcement plates and clips checking for
cracks or defects
B) The outside surface of the vessel and the insulation and coating systems
C) Associated structure, allowance for expansion, and general vessel
alignment on its supports
D) Leakage, hot spots and evidence of vibration
Answer: A…...API 510, External Inspection of Pressure Vessels [[Link].2]
=========================================================
125. An external inspection of a pressure vessel shall at least:
A) Measure the thickness coating under insulation
B) Determine the condition of the external insulation
C) Include results of the settlement survey
D) Report the corrosion rates determined during the inspection
Answer: B…...API 510, External Inspection of Pressure Vessels [[Link].2]
=========================================================
126. While inspecting an operating vessel you observe that distortion of a
vessel. recommend corrective actions you should?
A) the overall dimensions of the vessel shall be checked to determine the
extent of the distortion.
B) Write a report of the location with a recommendation for the type of
repairs needed.
C) Research the inspection records for previous failures of this type.
D) Check with a pressure vessel engineer
Answer: A…...API 510, External Inspection of Pressure Vessels [[Link].3]
=========================================================
127. Weep holes in reinforcement plates should :
A) Be closed to avoid entry of rain water, contaminants behind the
reinforcement plate which may cause serious corrosion.
B) Remain open to provide visual evidence of leakage.

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

C) Either A or B accepted.
D) Weep holes are never provided in reinforcement plates.
Answer: B…...API 510, External Inspection of Pressure Vessels [[Link].2]
=========================================================
128. Weep holes in reinforcement plates should remain open to provide visual
evidence of leakage. What other purpose do they serve?
A) Prevent pressure build up in the cavity
B) Allow for differential thermal growth
C) Provide thickness measurement locations under the plate
D) Provide visual access to the shell under the plate.
Answer: A…...API 510, External Inspection of Pressure Vessels [[Link].2]
=========================================================
129. External inspections are conducted to check for
A) check the condition of the outside surface of the vessel, insulation systems,
painting and coating systems, supports, and associated structure
B) leakage, hot spots, vibration, the allowance for expansion, and the general
alignment of the vessel on its supports.
C) Condition of the pressure boundary components only
D) Health and safety hazards
E) A and B above
Answer: E…...API 510, External Inspection of Pressure Vessels [[Link].2]
=========================================================
130. How is the inspection interval for buried vessels determined?
A) based on corrosion rate
B) based on the type of external coating used
C) based on an assessment of the cathodic protection system (if any exists)
effectiveness
D) A and C above
Answer: D.....API 510, Inspection of Buried Vessels [[Link]]
=========================================================
131. Although thickness measurements are not required to be obtained while
the pressure vessel is on- stream, why is on-stream thickness monitoring
performed ?
A) it is a good tool for monitoring corrosion rate.
B) it is a good tool for assessing potential damage due to process changes
C) it is a good tool for assessing potential damage due to operational changes
D) all of the above
Answer: D.....API 510, Thickness Examination / On-stream Inspection [[Link]
/ [Link]]

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

132. Who shall obtain thickness measurements of vessels during external
inspection?
A) the inspector
B) the examiner
C) the inspector or examiner
D) other personnel when acceptable to the inspector
Answer: C.....API 510, Thickness Examination [[Link]]
=========================================================
133. When short term corrosion rate, changes significantly from the previous
identified rate, The inspector should
A) Consult a corrosion specialist to determine cause.
B) Consult Engineer to determine cause.
C) Decide next inspection interval and remaining life based on the higher
corrosion rate.
D) B and C above.
Answer: A.....API 510, Thickness Examination [[Link]]
=========================================================
134. During an external inspection with thickness measurements of a pressure
vessel, an inspector calculates an accelerated corrosion rate from the previous
inspection. What should the inspector do ?
A) take additional thickness readings
B) perform UT scans in suspect areas
C) make revisions to the vessel's inspection plan
D) all of the above
Answer: D.....API 510, Thickness Examination [[Link]]
=========================================================
135. Who is responsible to assure that all individuals taking thickness
readings are trained and qualified in accordance with the applicable
procedure used during the examination?
A) the inspector
B) the owner/user
C) the engineer
D) the 3rd party examination company
Answer: B.....API 510, Thickness Examination [[Link]]
=========================================================
136. Regarding CUI Inspection of externally-insulated vessels, the susceptible
temperature range for Carbon & Low Alloy steels refers to which of these
operational temperature ranges?
A) 10°F (–12°C) to 350°F (175°C)
B) 10°F (–12°C) to 400°F (205°C)
C) 50ºF (10ºC) to 350ºF (175ºC)
D) 50ºF (10ºC) to 400ºF (205ºC)

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

Answer: A.....API 510, CUI Inspection [[Link]]
=========================================================
137. Regarding CUI Inspection of externally-insulated vessels, the susceptible
temperature range for Austenitic Stainless Steel refers to which of these
operational temperature ranges?
A) 10°F (–12°C) to 350°F (175°C)
B) 10°F (–12°C) to 400°F (205°C)
C) 50ºF (10ºC) to 350ºF (175ºC)
D) 140ºF (60ºC) to 350ºF (185ºC)
Answer: D.....API 510, CUI Inspection [[Link]]
=========================================================
138. What form of corrosion does CUI usually cause with austenitic stainless
steel materials?
A) localized corrosion
B) erosion-corrosion
C) crevice corrosion
D) stress corrosion cracking
Answer: D.....API 510, CUI Inspection [[Link]]
=========================================================
139. What form of corrosion does CUI usually cause with carbon and low alloy
steels materials ?
A) localized corrosion
B) erosion-corrosion
C) crevice corrosion
D) stress corrosion cracking
Answer: A.....API 510, CUI Inspection [[Link]]
=========================================================
140. What is an alternative to removing insulation from a pressure vessel
during a shutdown that is suspected to have CUI ?
A) Inspector may use similar service results from another similar vessel at
owner/user’s location
B) shell thickness measurements done internally at typical CUI problem areas
may be performed during internal inspection
C) Use of special “removable & replaceable” type insulation is a preferred
method of the code
D) None of these is correct per API 510
Answer: B.....API 510, CUI Inspection [[Link]]
=========================================================
141. Although external insulation on a vessel may appear to be in good
condition CUI damage may still be occurring. What should be considered for
insulation removal if CUI is suspected ?
A) history of CUI for the vessel or comparable equipment

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

B) visual condition of the external covering and insulation
C) evidence of fluid leakage
D) all of the above
Answer: D.....API 510, CUI Inspection [[Link]]
=========================================================
142. Who should be advised to report anything unusual associated with
pressure vessels and pressure-relieving devices to the unit inspector?
A) an inspector
B) an examiner
C) Engineer
D) Operator
Answer: D.....API 510, Operator Surveillance [5.5.7]
=========================================================
143. What is the purpose of condition monitoring locations ?
A) where thickness measurements are taken at each inspection to monitor the
corrosion mechanism
B) where periodic examinations are conducted to monitor the presence and
rate of damage
C) where measurements are taken at each inspection to examine the form of
corrosion
D) to monitor the operating conditions at that location
Answer: B.....API 510, CMLs [5.6.1]
=========================================================
144. What is the purpose of repetitive measurements at the same CMLs ?
A) repeating measurements at the same location is more efficient
B) repeating measurements at the same location is easier and takes less time,
thereby saving examiner costs
C) repeating measurements at the same location improves accuracy of the
calculated damage rate
D) repeating measurements at the same location improves the examiner
technique with more practice
Answer: C.....API 510, CMLs [[Link]]
=========================================================
145. While considering the number and placement of CLMs for a new pressure
vessel that may be susceptible to localized corrosion, who should the
inspector consult ?
A) the pressure vessel design engineer
B) the pressure vessel manufacturer
C) the corrosion specialist
D) the inspector should be able to make this determination on their own
Answer: C.....API 510, CMLs [5.6.3]

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

146. CMLs should be distributed:
A) Appropriately over a vessel
B) In highly stressed areas
C) In areas of proven corrosion
D) Near areas of past failure
Answer: A.....API 510, CMLs [5.6.3]
=========================================================
147. Condition Monitoring Locations (CMLs) should be distributed
appropriately over the vessel to provide adequate monitoring coverage
of________
A) Major pressure parts (major components and nozzles)
B) highly stressed areas
C) areas of proven corrosion
D) Near areas of past failure
Answer: A.....API 510, CMLs [5.6.3]
=========================================================
148. Pressure vessels with high potential consequences if failure should occur,
and
those subject to higher corrosion rates, localized corrosion, and high rates of
damage
from other mechanisms, will normally have
A) fewer CMLs and be monitored fewer frequently
B) more CMLs and be monitored more frequently
C) a representative sample of vessel nozzles should be measured and
recorded.
D) None of the above
Answer: B.....API 510, CMLs [[Link] ]
=========================================================
149. To comply with the requirements of API-510, how many thickness
measurements should be taken on a pressure vessel during an internal or on-
stream inspection?
A) A representative number that will establish areas of corrosion
B) At least one on each nozzle and two on each head and shell section
C) At lest one adjacent to each girth weld
D) Four points on the shell, one on each head, and one on all major nozzles
Answer: A.....API 510, CMLs [[Link] ]
=========================================================
150. fewer CMLs should be selected for pressure vessels If _______
A) higher expected or experienced corrosion rates;
B) higher potential for localized corrosion.
C) Corrosion is general ( generally uniform corrosion rates).
D) None of the above

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

Answer: C.....API 510, CMLs [[Link] ]
=========================================================
151. CMLs may be eliminated or the number significantly reduced
when_______
A) higher expected or experienced corrosion rates
B) higher potential for localized corrosion.
C) The probability and/or consequence of failure is low
D) None of the above
Answer: C.....API 510, CMLs [[Link] ]
=========================================================
152. CMLs may be eliminated or the number significantly reduced
when_______
A) higher expected or experienced corrosion rates
B) higher potential for localized corrosion.
C) clean noncorrosive hydrocarbon service
D) None of the above
Answer: C.....API 510, CMLs [[Link] ]
=========================================================
153. A minimal number of CMLs is acceptable provided:
A) The vessel is to be replaced within three months
B) An internal inspection is performed in lieu of an on-stream inspection
C) Insulation inhibits access to the vessel surface
D) The established corrosion rate is low and not localized
Answer: D.....API 510 CMLs [[Link] ]
=========================================================
154. An inspector evaluating thickness measurements taken on a pressure
vessel discovers indications of corrosion at only one of the corrosion
monitoring locations. What should the inspector do?
A) Calculate a new corrosion rate for the vessel, based on the single location
B) Take more measurements in the corroded area, to define the extent of
corrosion
C) Ask that another inspector re-take the measurement
D) Disregard the measurement because the rest did not indicate corrosion
Answer: B.....API 510,CMLs [[Link] ]
=========================================================
155. localized corrosion is expected, it is important that examinations are
conducted using scanning methods such as___________
A) profile radiography or scanning ultrasonic techniques
B) liquid penetrant testing
C) magnetic particle testing
D) radiographic testing
Answer: A.....API 510, CMLs [[Link] ]

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

156. In circumstances where CMLs will be substantially reduced or eliminated.
A) a corrosion specialist should be consulted.
B) Pressure vessel engineer should be consulted.
C) Approved of authorized inspector is required.
D) Record of two Consecutive CML shall be used.
Answer: A.....API 510, CMLs [[Link] ]
=========================================================
157. The next inspection intervals for vessels in corrosive service should be
determined by calculating remaining life of____________.
A) limiting component.
B) Shell and head .
C) All nozzles.
D) Internal component.
Answer: A.....API 510, CMLs [[Link] ]
=========================================================
158. For a locally corroded area of considerable size, where the following
thicknesses were measured over a 36 in. X 36 in. area with a 9 ft inside
diameter, what thickness would be used to determine the corrosion rate for a
pressure vessel?
A) 0.220 in.
B) 0.214 in.
C) 0.204 in.
D) 0.216 in
Answer: C.....API 510, CMLs [[Link] ]
=========================================================
159. In selecting the technique(s) to use during a pressure vessel inspection,
the possible types of damage for that vessel should be taken into
consideration. Who should the inspector consult to help define the type of
damage, the NDE technique and extent of examination?
A) the pressure vessel design engineer
B) the pressure vessel manufacturer
C) a corrosion specialist or an engineer
D) the inspector should be able to make this determination on their own
Answer: C.....API 510, Examination Technique Selection [[Link] ]
=========================================================
160. What is the purpose of using alternating current flux leakage
examination, eddy current examination, and acoustic emission examination
used during an inspection of a pressure vessel?
A) to measure residual magnetism that may cause welding problems (arc
blow)
B) to identify or monitor the specific type of damage
C) to measure the remaining wall thickness over a large area

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

D) to monitor for general corrosion over a large area
Answer: B.....API 510, Examination Technique Selection [[Link] ]
=========================================================
161. Acoustic emission techniques are used to detect:
A) Leakage
B) Structurally significant defects
C) Stress and/or distortion
D) Surface imperfection in non-ferromagnetic material
Answer: B.....API 510, Examination Technique Selection [[Link](h) ]
=========================================================
162. Alternating current flux leakage examination (ACFM) techniques are used
to detect:
A) porosity, weld slag inclusions, cracks, and thickness of components.
B) surface-breaking cracks and elongated discontinuities.
C) high-temperature hydrogen attack
D) localized metal loss, cracks, and elongated discontinuities
Answer: B.....API 510, Examination Technique Selection [[Link](e) ]
=========================================================
163. Normally, minimum thickness evaluation may be conducted by:
A) Ultrasonic testing (UT).
B) Liquid penetrant testing (PT).
C) Magnetic particle testing(MT).
D) Radiographic testing(RT).
Answer: A.....API 510, Examination Technique Selection [[Link](d) ]
=========================================================
164. Best method to detected subsurface crack in carbon steel material is:
A) Ultrasonic testing (UT).
B) Liquid penetrant testing (PT).
C) Wet fluorescent magnetic particle examination(WFMT).
D) Radiographic testing(RT).
Answer: C.....API 510, Examination Technique Selection [[Link](a) /Body
Knowledge]
=========================================================
165. Preferred methods of inspection for chloride-induced stress corrosion
cracking include:
A) Ultrasonic testing and visual testing.
B) Penetrant testing and eddy-current phase analysis.
C) Penetrant testing and radiographic testing.
D) Wet fluorescent magnetic particle testing and visual testing.
Answer: B.....API 510, Examination Technique Selection [API 571 ,[Link] (b)]

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

166. Cracks and other elongated discontinuations can be found by:
A) Visual testing (VT).
B) Liquid penetrant testing (PT).
C) Magnetic particle testing(MT).
D) Radiographic testing(RT).
Answer: C.....API 510, Examination Technique Selection [[Link](a)]
=========================================================
167. which of the following method is most suitable for detecting lamination::
A) Visual testing (VT).
B) Liquid penetrant testing (PT).
C) Ultrasonic testing (UT).
D) Radiographic testing(RT).
Answer: C.....API 510, Examination Technique Selection [Body Knowledge]
=========================================================
168. Radiograph testing (RT) for detecting _______
A) structurally significant defects
B) lamination.
C) temperature of components..
D) Subsurface crack.
Answer: D.....API 510, Examination Technique Selection [[Link](i)]
=========================================================
169. For proper internal or external visual inspection surfaces must be ?
A) Wire brushed.
B) Grit blasted.
C) water blasted.
D) The type of surface preparation depends on individual circumstances, NDE
technique and could be any of the above.
Answer: D.....API 510, Condition Monitoring Methods [[Link] ]
=========================================================
170. Which of is following is preferred techniques where corrosion is localized
or the remaining thickness is approaching the required thickness ?
A) Ultrasonic scanning .
B) Advanced ultrasonic backscatter technique
C) radiographic profile .
D) Ultrasonic scanning or radiographic profile .
Answer: D.....API 510, Condition Monitoring Methods [[Link] ]
=========================================================
171. Which of the following is not suitable for determining the thickness of a
part?
A) Ultrasonic shear wave
B) Profile radiography
C) Ultrasonic straight beam

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

D) Ultrasonic “A” scan
Answer: A....API 510, Condition Monitoring Methods [[Link] / [Link] /[Link] ]
=========================================================
172. Factors that can contribute to reduced accuracy of ultrasonic
measurements include all of the following EXCEPT:
A) Small flaw detector screens
B) Subsurface material flaws, such as laminations
C) Doubling of the thickness response on thicker materials
D) Temperature effects at temperatures 150ºF (65ºC)
Answer: C.....API 510, Condition Monitoring Methods [[Link]]
=========================================================
173. Corrective procedures should be utilized when metal temperatures
____________impact the accuracy of the thickness measurements obtained.
A ) typically above 150 ºF (65 ºC)
B ) typically above 200 ºF (93 ºC)
C) typically above 68 ºF (20 ºC)
D ) typically above 860 ºF (460 ºC)
Answer: A.....API 510, Condition Monitoring Methods [[Link]]
=========================================================
174. The apparent thickness reading obtained from steel walls having elevated
temperatures is high (too thick) by a factor of about__________
A ) 1% per 55 ºC(100 ºF).
B) 2% per 93 ºC (200 ºF).
C) 3% per 20 ºC (68 ºF)
D) 8% per 460 ºC (860 ºF)
Answer: A.....API 510, Condition Monitoring Methods [[Link]] /]/ASME V,
[SE-797 ,9.5]
=========================================================
175. if the instrument was standardized on a piece of similar material at 20°C
(68°F), and if the reading was obtained with a surface temperature of 460°C
(860°F),the apparent reading should be_______
A ) reduced by 1%.
B) reduced by 4%.
C) Increase by 8%.
D) reduced by 8%.
Answer: D.....API 510, Condition Monitoring Methods [[Link]] /]/ASME V,
[SE-797 ,9.5]
=========================================================
176. when the detection of interior surface -breaking flaws from the external
surface is required , the owner/user:
A) should conduct performance testing of the examiners on-site
B) should determine the qualifications and ability of the examiners.

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

C) shall specify industry -qualified ultrasonic testing shear wave examiners
D) shall specify that ASNT level III examiners oversee the work
Answer: C.....API 510, Condition Monitoring Methods [[Link]]
=========================================================
177. If a measurement method produces considerable uncertainty, Which of
the following Nondestructive thickness measurement techniques may be
employed?
A) Liquid penetrant testing (PT).
B) Wet fluorescent magnetic particle examination(WFMT).
C) Radiographic testing(RT).
D) Ultrasonic A-scan, B-scan, or C-scan
Answer: D.....API 510, Condition Monitoring Methods [[Link]]
=========================================================
178. What is the minimum test pressure for vessels rerated using the design
allowable stress of ASME Section VIII: Division 1, published prior to the 1999
addendum ?
A. 110% of MAWP
B. 125% of MAWP and corrected for temperature
C. 130% of MAWP and corrected for temperature
D. 150% of MAWP and corrected for temperature
Answer: D.....API 510, Pressure Testing [[Link] ]
=========================================================
179. If vessel stamp shows a 1997 construction date & a vessel has not been
rerated, then what is the minimum test pressure is to be applied to satisfy API
510 code requirements?
A) Test Pressure in psi = 1.3 MAWP × (S test temp / S design temp)
B) Test Pressure in psi = 1.4 MAWP × (S test temp / S design temp)
C) Test Pressure in psi = 1.5 MAWP × (S test temp / S design temp)
D) The test pressure is left to the discretion of the Inspector
Answer: C.....API 510, Pressure Testing [[Link] ]
=========================================================
180. A pressure test is normally required after
A. an alteration
B. major repair
C. repair done it on pressure parts.
D. an alteration or major repair
Answer: D.....API 510, Pressure Testing [[Link] ]
=========================================================
181. Pressure tests are normally required:
A) At the discretion of the Inspector
B) After an alteration
C) After most routine repairs

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

D) After temporary repairs
Answer: B.....API 510, Pressure Testing [[Link] ]
=========================================================
182. After repairs are completed, a pressure test shall be applied in all of
these cases EXCEPT:
A) If Inspector believes one is necessary
B) If an Engineer believes one is necessary
C) In event of a crack repair at a very deep excavation in an area of high stress
concentration
D) In event that a vessel section or component has been given a new nozzle
Answer: B.....API 510, Pressure Testing [[Link] & [Link] ]
=========================================================
183. When a non-code related pressure test is performed after repairs, what is
the minimum required hydrostatic test pressure ?
A. 130% of MAWP and corrected for temperature
B. 150% of MAWP and corrected for temperature
C. at pressures determined by the owner/user
D. at pressures determined by the inspector
Answer: C.....API 510, Pressure Testing [[Link] ]
=========================================================
184. What is the minimum hydrostatic test pressure for an existing vessel that
is being rerated using the design allowable stress published in the 2004
edition of ASME Section VIII: Division I, where the MAWP is 500 psi and the
allowable stress factor correction is 0.8 ?
A. 440 psi
B. 520 psi
C. 650 psi
D. 800 psi
Answer: B.....API 510, Pressure Testing [[Link] ]
=========================================================
185. What is the minimum hydrostatic test pressure for an existing vessel that
is being rerated using the design allowable stress published in the 1983
edition of ASME Section VIII: Division I, where the MAWP is 500 psi and the
allowable stress factor correction is 0.8?
A. 440 psi
B. 520 psi
C. 600 psi
D. 750 psi
Answer: C.....API 510, Pressure Testing [[Link] ]

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

186. After repairs are completed, a pressure test is to be applied. Vessel stamp
construction date = 1997 and the vessel was rerated in 2009. Given: Vessel
MAWP = 1,000 psi (2009) and the Stest temp/Sdesign temp ratio = 1.1. What
test pressure is to be applied to meet code?
A) Test Pressure in psi = 1.5 × 1000 x 1.1 = 1650 psi
B) Test Pressure in psi = 1.3 × 1000 x 1.1 = 1430 psi
C) Test Pressure in psi = 1.4 × 1000 x 1.1 = 1540 psi
D) Either A or B, up to the discretion of the Inspector
Answer: C.....API 510, Pressure Testing [[Link] ]
=========================================================
187. A horizontal vessel having a U Stamp that is being rerated using the
design allowable stress published in the 1999 edition of ASME Section VIII:
Division I, where the MAWP is 150 psi @ 400 F and the allowable stress S
design temp = 15 ksi and S test temp = 15.4 ksi . What is required test
pressure at the top of the vessel?
A) 195 psi
B) 225 psi
C) 230 psi
D) None of these
Answer: .....API 510, Pressure Testing [[Link] ]
=========================================================
188. After completion or repairs a pressure test?
A. Must always be conducted
B. Shall be applied if the authorized pressure vessel inspector believes that
one is necessary
C. Must never be conducted
D. Shall be conducted only if repair is done on pressure parts.
Answer: B.....API 510, Pressure Testing [[Link] ]
=========================================================
189. When is a pressure test normally required, without being specifically
requested by an API inspector?
A. During a routine inspection
B. Following a failure
C. After an alteration
D. After a repair
Answer: C.....API 510, Pressure Testing [[Link] ]
=========================================================
190. Per API 510, when a non-code related pressure test is performed after
repairs, the test pressure may be conducted at pressures determined by:
A) Inspector only
B) Engineer only
C) Both Inspector and Engineer

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

D) None of these
Answer: D.....API 510, Pressure Testing [[Link] ]
=========================================================
191. A close visual inspection of pressure vessel components should not be
performed until the vessel pressure is ______________:
A) below the MAWP
B) at the MAWP
C) above the MAWP
D) at or below the MAWP
Answer: D.....API 510, Pressure Test Preparation [[Link]]
=========================================================
192. Before applying hydro-test to piping systems, consideration shall be
given to:
A) Piping material
B) Piping configuration
C) Supporting structure and foundation design
D) Flange pressure rating
Answer: C.....API 510, Hydrostatic Pressure Tests [[Link]]
=========================================================
193. A pressure vessel is scheduled for pneumatic testing using the
methodology required by ASME Code section VIII, Division I, with the
maximum allowable working pressure =852 Psig at 500 ˚ F (260˚ C).The
vessel’s allowable stress is the same at both design and test temperatures.
The minimum test metal temperature will be 50˚F(10˚C).per the owner’s
specifications .How many pressurization steps will be needed to reach the
minimum required test pressure and at what minimum pressure will the
visual examination be performed ?
A) 6 steps ;852 psig
B) 6 steps ,937.2 psig
C) 9 steps ;852 psig
D) 9 steps; 937.2 psig
Answer: A.....API 510, Pneumatic Pressure Tests [5.8.6]/ASME [Link].1 ,
Pneumatic Test [UG-100(b & d)]
=========================================================
194. A pressure vessel is scheduled for pneumatic testing using the
methodology of ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1, with the maximum
allowable working pressure = 635 psig at 375° F. ).The vessel’s allowable
stress is the same at both design and test temperatures. The vessel is
constructed of SA-516 Gr. 65 material and is neither enameled nor lined. The
test metal temperature will be a minimum of 50° F, per the owner's
specifications. How many pressurization steps are needed to achieve the

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

minimum required test pressure, and at what minimum pressure will the
visual examination be performed??
A) 6 steps ; 635 psig
B) 6 steps ,698.5 psig
C) 9 steps ; 635 psig
D) 9 steps; 698.5 psig
Answer: A.....API 510, Pneumatic Pressure Tests [5.8.6]/ASME [Link].1 ,
Pneumatic Test [UG-100(b & d)]
=========================================================
195. Which of the following should be done when a vessel hydrostatic pressure
test is being conducted and the test pressure exceeds the set pressure of the
safety relief valve?
A) Vent the safety relief valve in a safe direction (away form personnel), and
test it at the same time as the pressure test of the vessel
B) A properly locked out block valve between the safety relief valve and vessel
will sufficiently isolate the relief valve
C) The safety relief valve should be removed, or test clamp can be used to hold
down the safety relief valve disk
D) Apply additional load to the valve spring by adjusting the compression
screw
Answer: C.....API 510, Pressure Test Preparation [[Link]]
=========================================================
196. What is the most appropriate action when a large vessel and its
structural supports are designed inadequately for a hydrostatic test?
a) Provide additional temporary supports and then conduct the hydrostatic
test
b) Substitute a vacuum (negative pressure) test at 1.5 times the operating
pressure
c) Consider substituting a pneumatic test for the hydrostatic test
d) Perform 100% volumetric examination of all welds in lieu of a hydrostatic
test
Answer: C.....API 510, Pneumatic Pressure Tests [5.8.6]
=========================================================
197. For hydrostatic pressure tests of equipment having components of Type
300 series stainless steel, what is the maximum chloride content for potable
water or steam condensate used in the test ?
A. < 50 ppb
B. < 50 ppm
C. < 100 ppm
D. < 1000 ppm
Answer: B.....API 510, Hydrostatic Pressure Tests [[Link] ]

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

198. What should not be done when a hydrostatic pressure test is to be
conducted on a vessel in which the test pressure will exceed the set pressure
of the pressurerelieving devices ?
A. apply an additional load to the pressure relieving device valve spring by
turning the compression screw
B. the pressure-relieving devices should be removed
C. use test clamps to hold down the valve disks
D. pressure gauges that may be incapable of withstanding the test pressure
should be removed or blanked off
Answer: A.....API 510, Pressure Test Preparation [[Link] ]
=========================================================
199. When would a pneumatic test be used instead of a hydrostatic Test ?
A. Because a vessel contains refractory lining
B. Because a vessel contains rubber or glass-reinforced plastic (GRP) linings
C. Because a vessel is constructed of 300 series stainless-steel
D. Because a vessel is of riveted construction
Answer: A.....API 510, Hydrostatic Pressure Tests [[Link] ]
=========================================================
200. To minimize the risk of brittle fracture in an operational vessel during a
pressure test after a repair, what metal temperature should be maintained
during the test for a vessel thickness of 2 inches?
A) at least 10°F above the MDMT
B) at least 30°F above the MDMT
C) at least 10°F above ambient metal temperature
D) at least 30°F above ambient metal temperature
Answer: A.....API 510, Brittle Fracture Considerations [[Link] ]
=========================================================
201. To minimize the risk of brittle fracture in an operational vessel during a
pressure test after a repair, what metal temperature should be maintained
during the
test for a vessel thickness of 2.5 inches?
A) at least 10°F above the MDMT
B) at least 30°F above the MDMT
C) at least 10°F above ambient metal temperature
D) at least 30°F above ambient metal temperature
Answer: B.....API 510, Brittle Fracture Considerations [[Link] ]
202. What is API 510 recommended maximum metal temperature to be
maintained
during a hydrostatic test (assuming no other Brittle Fracture information
indicates
that a higher metal temperature is needed)?
A) 30 ° F (17°C) above the material’s MDMT

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

B) 30 ° F (17°C) above ambient metal temp
C) 120 ° F (50°C) is the maximum temperature
D) There is no maximum limit in API 510
Answer: C.....API 510, Brittle Fracture Considerations [[Link] ]
=========================================================
203. Unless there is information on the brittle characteristics of a vessel
material indicating a higher test temperature is needed, what is the maximum
hydrostatic pressure test temperature?
A) need not exceed 100°F
B) need not exceed 120°F
C) need not exceed 150°F
D) need not exceed 212°F
Answer: B.....API 510, Brittle Fracture Considerations [[Link] ]
=========================================================
204. Which of the following steels are most susceptible to Temper
Embrittlement?
A) Carbon steels
B) C-0.5 Moly
C) 1.25Cr- 0.5 Mo
D) 2.25Cr -1 Mo
Answer: D.....API 510, Test Temperature and Brittle Fracture Considerations
[[Link] ] /temper embrittlement [3.1.69]
=========================================================
205. To minimize the risk of brittle fracture in an operational vessel during a
pressure test after a repair, what is the minimum metal temperature that
should be maintained during the test for a vessel thickness of 2.5 inches with
a MDMT of 0°F?
A) 50°F
B) 30°F
C) -0°F
D) -10°F
Answer: B.....API 510, Minimum Metal Temperature [[Link] ]
=========================================================
206. To minimize the risk of brittle fracture in an operational vessel during a
pressure test after a repair, what is the minimum metal temperature that
should be maintained during the test for a vessel thickness of 0.500 inch with
a MDMT of -40°F?
A) 50°F
B) 0°F
C) -10°F
D) -30°F
Answer: D.....API 510, Minimum Metal Temperature [[Link] ]

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

207. when a pressure test ( hydrostatic test ) is not performed after an
alteration:
A) Either an Engineer or an Inspector have approved the substitution
B) Both the Engineer and Inspector have approved the substitution
C) Inspector has approved the substitution
D) Engineer has approved the substitution
Answer: B.....API 510, Pressure Testing Alternatives [[Link]/[Link] ]
=========================================================
208. Substituting NDE procedures for pressure test after an alteration is
allowed only after:
A) Appropriate NDE (e.g. RT, UT, PT, MT, etc.) shall be specified and
conducted .
B) Sensitive leak test is required.
C) Pneumatic pressure test is required .
D) Additional weld quality required.
Answer: A.....API 510, Pressure Testing Alternatives [[Link]/[Link] ]
=========================================================
209. After completion of alterations a pressure test is:
A) Normally required
B) Appropriate NDT shall be specified and conducted when a pressure test is
not performed.
C) Substituting NDE procedures for a pressure test after an alteration or
major repair may be done only after the engineer and inspector have
approved.
D) All of the above
Answer: D.....API 510, Pressure Testing Alternatives [[Link]/[Link] ]
=========================================================
210. During repairs or alterations of pressure vessels, the inspector shall
verify that all new materials (including carbon steel) are consistent with the
specs. At the discretion of owner/user or inspector, assessment can be done
by all of these methods EXCEPT:
A) 100% verification checks
B) Sampling a percentage of materials in critical situations
C) Positive Material Identification (PMI) Practices & Procedures
D) Optical fluorescence analyzers or x-ray spectrographic analyzers
Answer: D.....API 510, Material Verification and Traceability [5.9.1]
=========================================================
211. If a pressure vessel component experiences accelerated corrosion or
should fail because an incorrect material was inadvertently substituted for
the specified material, what is inspector correct action?
A) 100% verification checks
B) Sampling a percentage of materials in critical situations

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

C) 100 % positive material identification (PMI), or
D) the inspector shall consider the need for further verification of existing
materials in the pressure vessel
Answer: D.....API 510, Material Verification and Traceability [5.9.2]
=========================================================
212. During repairs or alterations of pressure vessels, when an inspector
verifies new materials are consistent with the specifications, who decides the
sampling size for this assessment?
A) the owner/user
B) the inspector
C) the owner/user or the inspector
D) the inspector in consultation with the corrosion specialist
Answer: C.....API 510, Material Verification and Traceability [5.9.1]
=========================================================
213. During welding repair , who is responsible traceability of material to the
original idenfication?
A) The owner/user
B) The inspector
C) The Repair organization
D) The Pressure vessel engineer
Answer: B.....API 510, Material Verification and Traceability [5.9.1]
=========================================================
214. During repairs or alterations of pressure vessels, when an inspector or
examiner verifies new materials are consistent with the specifications, what
is the sampling size for this assessment ?
A) 10% verification checking
B) by sampling a percentage of the materials in critical situations
C) 10% verification checking or by sampling a percentage of the materials in
critical situations
D) 100% verification checking or by sampling a percentage of the materials in
critical situations
Answer: D.....API 510, Material Verification and Traceability [5.9.1]
=========================================================
215. The document giving guidance on performing the Material Verification
Program is given by which document.
A) API 578
B) API 577
C) API 576
D) API 575
Answer: A.....API 510, Material Verification and Traceability [5.9.1]

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

216. Who shall assess preferential weld corrosion in an operating pressure
vessel?
A) the inspector
B) the engineer
C) corrosion specialist
D) an engineer and/or corrosion specialist
Answer: A.....API 510, Inspection of In-service Welds and Joints [5.10.3]
=========================================================
217. According to API 510, Crack like flaws and environmental cracking shall
be assessed by ____________
A) the inspector
B) the engineer
C) corrosion specialist
D) an engineer and/or corrosion specialist
Answer: D.....API 510, Inspection of In-service Welds and Joints [5.10.3]
=========================================================
218. An engineer is consultant in case of ____________
A) Crack-like flaws and environmental cracking
B) Preferential weld corrosion in the HAZ
C) preferential weld corrosion in an operating pressure vessel.
D) Pitting
Answer: A.....API 510, Inspection of In-service Welds and Joints [5.10.3]
=========================================================
219. Which of these in-service weld defects can be assessed by the
inspector alone ?
A) Crack-like flaws and environmental cracking
B) Preferential weld corrosion in the HAZ
C) SCC.
D) Straight, dagger-shaped, crack-like flaws
Answer: B.....API 510, Inspection of In-service Welds and Joints [5.10.3]
=========================================================
220. Flange fasteners should be fully engaged with the nut. Any fastener
failing to do so is considered acceptably engaged if lack of complete
engagement is –
A) One Thread maximum
B) One Thread Minimum
C) Two Thread Maximum
D) Two Threads Minimum
Answer: A.....API 510, Inspection and Repair of Flanged Joints [5.11.3]

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

221. Which of these would not normally be included in a pre-use (installation)
external inspection of a pressure vessel ?
A) Review of detailed design calculation
B) Check ladders and platforms
C) Wall thickness checks
D) Verify the nameplate correlates with the manufacturer’s data report (MDR)
Answer: A.....API 510, Vessel Installations [[Link]]
=========================================================
222. An inspector discovering that a newly installed vessel has a missing
manufacturer’s data report should ?
A) Perform an internal inspection of the vessel
B) Prohibit the vessel from being used
C) Remove the nameplate
D) Inform the owner/user
Answer: A.....API 510, Vessel Installations [[Link]]
=========================================================
223. Who shall inspect and make sure that the new installation Pressure
vessel is safe for operation?
A) the inspector
B) the engineer
C) corrosion specialist
D) an engineer and/or corrosion specialist
Answer: A.....API 510, Vessel Installations [[Link]]
=========================================================
224. The purpose of new pressure vessel inspections at the time of
installation is to_____________
A) verify the equipment is safe for operation
B) verify the equipment materials
C) verify thicknesses at CMLs
D) verify the equipment is safe for operation
Answer: D.....API 510, Vessel Installations [[Link]]
=========================================================
225. What is the purpose of inspecting a pressure vessel at the time of
installation if it has already passed final manufacturing inspections?
A) to verify the equipment is safe for operation
B) to verify the equipment materials
C) to verify thicknesses at CMLs
D) to verify the equipment is safe for operation, and to initiate plant
inspection records for the equipment
Answer: D.....API 510, Vessel Installations [[Link]]

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

226. If the service conditions of a vessel are changed , what needs to be done?
A) The inspection intervals shall be established for the new service
conditions.
B) an internal inspection is required prior releasing the vessel for
transportation to the new owner
C) an external inspection is required prior releasing the vessel for
transportation to the new owner
D) nothing new has to be done provided the inspectors at both locations
approve
Answer: A.....API 510, : Vessel Service Change [[Link]]
=========================================================
227. A vessel is being changed from ethylene condensate service to steam
condensate service. The corrosion rate of the vessel in ethylene service was 1
mil per year. What should the inspector do?
A) Require re-rating the vessel
B) Require a pressure test on the vessel
C) Establish a new probable corrosion rate
D) Maintain the corrosion rate to determine if it was correct
Answer: C.....API 510, : Vessel Service Change [[Link]]
=========================================================
228. Which of the following is / are to be undertaken in case the ownership
and location of vessel are changed?
A) The vessel shall be hydro tested only.
B) The vessel shall be internally and externally inspected before it is re-used.
C) inspection should include baseline examinations for any anticipated future
examinations planned as a result of the new service
D) Only “B” and “C”
Answer: D.....API 510, : Vessel Service Change [[Link]]
=========================================================
229. If both the ownership and the location of a pressure vessel are changed,
what needs to be done?
A) the vessel shall be internally and externally inspected before it is reused.
B) an internal inspection is required prior releasing the vessel for
transportation to the new owner
C) an external inspection is required prior releasing the vessel for
transportation to the new owner
D) nothing new has to be done provided the inspectors at both locations
approve
Answer: A.....API 510, : Vessel Service Change [[Link]]
=========================================================
230. An RBI assessment may be used to establish inspection intervals for:
A) Internal inspections only

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

B) Internal and external inspections only
C) Internal, on-stream and external inspection
D) Vessels that have undergone a service change
Answer: C.....API 510, : RBI [6.3.1]
=========================================================
231. When a RBI assessment is used for an operating pressure vessel and
establishes new inspection intervals, can it exceed the limits from the
previously established inspection intervals?
A) yes, but only for the 10-year inspection on-stream inspections
B) yes, but only for one-half remaining life limits for internal inspections
C) yes, but only for five-year inspection limit for the external inspections
D) yes, for any previous inspection interval
Answer: D.....API 510, : RBI [6.3.1]
=========================================================
232. The RBI assessment shall be reviewed and approved by the engineer and
inspector at______________
A) intervals not to exceed 5 years
B) intervals not to exceed 10 years
C) intervals not to exceed 15 years
D) intervals not to exceed 20 years
Answer: B.....API 510, : RBI [6.3.2]
=========================================================
233. A pressure vessel internal inspection frequency can be increased more
than 10 years provided RBI evaluation is carried out. It should be approved
by?
A) Owner user/Jurisdiction
B) Pressure vessel engineer
C) Authorized inspector
D) Pressure vessel engineer & authorized inspector
Answer: D.....API 510, : RBI [6.3.2]
=========================================================
234. Unless justified by an RBI assessment, each aboveground vessel shall be
given a visual external inspection at an interval that does not exceed____
A) five years
B) the required internal inspection.
C) the required internal/on-stream inspection.
D) the lesser of five years or the required internal/on-stream inspection.
Answer: D.....API 510, : External Inspection [6.4.1]
235. The maximum interval external inspection is 5 years when ?
A) a pressure vessel in continuous service.
B) a pressure vessel in non-continuous service.

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

C) a pressure vessel operates for 6 months in every year and is placed under a
nitrogen purge each time after being idled.
D) All of the above are correct (for all operation circumstance intermittent or
not ).
Answer: D.....API 510, : External Inspection [6.4.1]
=========================================================
236. External inspection interval is established by____
A) Owner user/Jurisdiction
B) Pressure vessel engineer
C) Authorized inspector
D) Pressure vessel engineer or authorized inspector
Answer: D.....API 510, : External Inspection [6.4.1]
=========================================================
237. When may an aboveground vessel be visually inspected externally at an
interval that exceeds the lesser of five years or the required internal/on-
stream inspection ?
A) when justified by the engineer
B) when justified by an RBI assessment
C) when justified by the inspector in consultation with the corrosion
specialist
D) when justified by the engineer in consultation with the corrosion specialist
and the inspector
Answer: B.....API 510, : External Inspection [6.3.1/6.4.1]
=========================================================
238. Assuming no RBI and the Internal Inspection Interval has been set at 4
years, what is the maximum external inspection interval allowed per API 510
rules?
A) Five (5) years is the maximum inspection interval allowed
B) Four (4) years is the maximum inspection interval allowed
C) Two (2) years is the maximum inspection interval allowed
D) None of these is correct per API 510 rules
Answer: B.....API 510, : External Inspection [6.4.1]
=========================================================
239. Assuming no RBI and the Internal Inspection Interval has been set at 8
years, what is the maximum external inspection interval allowed per API 510
rules?
A) Eight (8) years is the maximum inspection interval since it cannot exceed
the Internal interval
B) Five (5) years is the maximum inspection interval allowed by API 510 given
these conditions
C) Four (4) years is the maximum inspection interval allowed by API 510
given these conditions

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

D) None of these is correct per API 510 rules
Answer: B.....API 510, : External Inspection [6.4.1]
=========================================================
240. Assuming no RBI assessment, the period between internal or on-stream
inspections:
A) Shall not exceed 10 years or the remaining life of the vessel, whichever is
the lesser
B) Shall not exceed 10 years or the remaining life of the vessel, whichever is
the greater
C) Shall not exceed 10 years or one half the remaining life of the vessel,
whichever is lesser
D) Shall not exceed 10 years or one half the remaining life of the vessel,
whichever is greater
Answer: C.....API 510, : Inspection Interval [[Link]]
=========================================================
241. For pressure vessels in non-continuous service, inspection intervals can
be based on the number of years of actual service that the vessel operated, not
calendar years, provided that all of the following precautions are taken
EXCEPT:
A) After being idled, a vessel is isolated from all process fluids
B) After being idled, a vessel is placed under a nitrogen purge
C) After being idled, a vessel is filled with non-corrosive hydrocarbons
D) After being idled, a vessel is completely drained and then opened to dry out
Answer: D.....API 510, : : Inspection Interval [[Link]]
=========================================================
242. When a pressure vessel remaining life is less than 4 years, the internal or
on-stream inspection Interval may be:
A) Full remaining life (but less than 4 years)
B) Full remaining life up to a maximum of 3 years
C) Full remaining life up to a maximum of 2 years
D) Only ½ of the vessel’s remaining life in all cases where remaining life is
less than 4 years
Answer: C.....API 510, : : Inspection Interval [[Link]]
=========================================================
243. When a pressure vessel remaining life is 1.5 years; the internal or on-
stream inspection Interval may be a maximum of:
A) Only ½ of the vessel’s remaining life (0.75 years in this case)
B) Full remaining life (1.5 years in this case)
C) A maximum of 2 years in this case
D) None of these
Answer: B.....API 510, : : Inspection Interval [[Link]]

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

244. A pressure vessel has been in non-continuous service for 15 years. During
this time, it has been filled three times, for two years at a time, and then
internally inspected. The last internal inspection determined that the vessel
had a remaining life of nine years. When is the next inspection due?
A) Before 4.5 years of actual service
B) Before 5 years of actual service
C) Before 9 years of actual service
D) Before a maximum of 10 years of actual service
Answer: A.....API 510, : : Inspection Interval [6.4.1/ [Link]]
=========================================================
245. Unless an RBI assessment is performed, what is the maximum internal or
on-stream inspection interval using the projected MAWP method ?
A) 4 years maximum
B) 5 years
C) 10 years
D) as required by the engineer
Answer: C.....API 510, : : Inspection Interval [[Link]]
=========================================================
246. The external Inspection Interval for pressure vessel with 8 years
remaining life , that has been out of service 5 years is_________
A) Two (2) years
B) Four (4) years
C) Five (5) years
D) Six (6)years
Answer: B.....API 510, : : External Inspection [6.4.1/ 6.4.2] /Inspection
Interval [[Link]]
=========================================================
247. On May 1, 2014, a vessel’s remaining life was calculated at 18 months.
What is latest date allowed by code to perform the next Internal or On-Stream
inspection (OSI) and the next date for external inspection (assume no RBI and
vessel is large enough for internal access)?
A) Internal or On-stream inspection and external are due in 18 months no
later than November 1, 2015
B) Internal or On-stream inspection and external are due in 9 months no later
than February 1, 2015
C) Both Internal or On-Stream inspection and external inspections are due in
18 months no later than November 1, 2015
D) Both Internal or On-Stream inspection and external inspections are due in
9 month no later than February 1, 2015
Answer: C.....API 510, : : Inspection Interval [6.4.1/ [Link]]

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

248. On April 1, 2011, a vessel’s remaining life was calculated at 1.75 years.
What is the latest date allowed by the code to perform the next Internal or On-
Stream inspection (OSI) and the next external inspection?
A) Internal or On-stream inspection and external are 2 years due in due
February 15, 2012
B) Internal or On-stream inspection and external are 1.75 years due in due
January 1, 2013
C) Internal or On-stream inspection and external are 1.75 years due in due
April 1, 2013
D) None of these is correct ,External inspection is required before an Internal
or On-stream inspections
Answer: B.....API 510, : : Inspection Interval [ [Link]]
=========================================================
249. On April 1, 2013, a vessel’s remaining life was calculated at 3 years. What
is the latest date allowed by the code to perform the next Internal or On-
Stream inspection (OSI) and the next external inspection?
A) Internal or On-stream inspection and external are 1.5 years due in due
October 1, 2014
B) Internal or On-stream inspection and external are 2 years due in due April
1, 2015
C) Internal or On-stream inspection and external are 3 years due in due April
1, 2015
D) None of these is correct ,External inspection is required before an Internal
or Onstream inspections
Answer: B.....API 510, : : Inspection Interval [ [Link]]
=========================================================
250. For a pressure vessel in non-continuous service (vessel working 6
months only per year), When is the next internal inspection for a pressure
vessel last inspected on May 1995?
A) May 2000.
B) May 2005
C) May 2015
D) May 2020.
Answer: C.....API 510, : : Inspection Interval [[Link]]
=========================================================
251. For a pressure vessel in non-continuous service (operates for 6 months in
every year and is placed under a nitrogen purge each time after being idled),
what are maximum possible internal and external inspection intervals
(assume NO RBI & calculated remaining life = 30 years)?
A) 10 calendar years Internal inspection interval and 5 calendar years external
inspection interval.

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

B) 15 calendar years Internal inspection interval and 10 calendar years
external inspection interval.
C) 20 calendar years Internal inspection interval and 5 calendar years
external inspection interval.
D) 30 calendar years Internal inspection interval and 10 calendar years
external inspection interval.
Answer: C.....API 510, : : Inspection Interval [6.4.1/ [Link]]
=========================================================
252. For a pressure vessel in non-continuous service (operates for 4 months in
every year and is placed under a nitrogen purge each time after being idled),
what are maximum possible internal and external inspection intervals
(assume NO RBI)?
A) 10 calendar years Internal inspection interval and 5 calendar years external
inspection interval.
B) 15 calendar years Internal inspection interval and 10 calendar years
external inspection interval.
C) 20 calendar years Internal inspection interval and 5 calendar years
external inspection interval.
D) 30 calendar years Internal inspection interval and 5 calendar years
external inspection interval.
Answer: D.....API 510, : : Inspection Interval [6.4.1/ [Link]]
=========================================================
253. What is the interval between internal inspections for a vessel with a
projected remaining life of 30 years that is in continuous use?
A) 5 years
B) 10 years
C) 15 years
D) At the discretion of the engineer and inspector
Answer: B.....API 510, : : Inspection Interval [[Link]]
=========================================================
254. A vessel has a projected remaining life of 15 years under its current
regime of being in use 50 % of the time. The remainder of the time it is
isolated from the process fluid and damage mechanisms by being filled with
nitrogen. What is the internal inspection interval?
A) 5 years
B) 7 1/2 years
C) 10 years
D) 12 1/2 years
Answer: B.....API 510, : : Inspection Interval [[Link]/ [Link]]

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

255. Unless justified by a RBI assessment, what is the maximum period
between
internal or on-stream inspections, provided it is more than 4 years?
A) shall not exceed one half the remaining life of the vessel
B) shall not exceed one half the remaining life of the vessel or 10 years,
whichever is less
C) 5 years
D) 10 years
Answer: B.....API 510, : : Inspection Interval [[Link]]
=========================================================
256. What is the interval between internal or on-stream inspections for a
pressure vessel with 22 years of remaining life ?
A) in 22 years
B) in 11 years
C) in 10 years
D) in 5 years
Answer: C.....API 510, : : Inspection Interval [[Link]]
=========================================================
257. When is the next inspection interval for a pressure vessel with 1.5 years
of remaining life ?
A) in 1 year
B) in 1.5 years
C) in 6 months
D) in 9 months
Answer: B.....API 510, : : Inspection Interval [[Link]]
=========================================================
258. What is the maximum period between internal or on-stream inspections
for pressure vessels that are in non-continuous service, but are adequately
protected from corrosive environments?
A) 5 years maximum
B) the same as for vessels in continuous service
C) as required by the engineer
D) the interval is based on the number of years of actual service (vessel in
operation)
Answer: D.....API 510, : Inspection Interval [[Link]]
=========================================================
259. The Remaining Life of a vessel is 2 years. Determine the Intervals for the
Internal and External Inspections.?
A) 2 years Internal Interval Inspections and 2 years External Interval
Inspections
B) 3 years Internal Interval Inspections and 3 years External Interval
Inspections

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

C) 1 years Internal Interval Inspections and 1 years External Interval
Inspections
D) 10 years Internal Interval Inspections and 5 years External Interval
Inspections
Answer: A.....API 510, : Inspection Interval [6.4.1/ [Link]]
=========================================================
260. On-stream inspections may be substituted for internal inspections
whenever Inspector approves the substitution and:
A) Whenever size or configuration makes internal inspection vessel entry
physically impossible
B) Whenever the general corrosion rate is less than 5 MPY (0.005 inches or
0.125 mm per year)
C) Whenever the vessel remaining life is greater than 10 years
D) Whenever no questionable condition is found during the External
Inspection
Answer: A.....API 510, : On-stream Inspection in Lieu of Internal Inspections
[[Link] (a) ]
=========================================================
261. Assuming no RBI, On-stream inspections may be substituted for internal
inspections if all of the following are true EXCEPT:
A) Inspector must approve the substitution
B) Size or configuration makes internal inspection or vessel entry physically
impossible
C) General Corrosion rate is less than 5 MPY & vessel remaining life is greater
than 10 years
D) No questionable conditions were in evidence during performance of
External Inspections
Answer: B.....API 510, : On-stream Inspection in Lieu of Internal Inspections
[[Link] (b 1 to 7) ]
=========================================================
262. If a vessel is not subject to environment cracking, an on-stream
inspection can be substituted for an internal inspection if the known
corrosion rate is less than:
A) 0.001 inch per year and the remaining life is greater than 5 years
B) 0.005 inch per year and the remaining life is greater than 5 years
C) 0.001 inch per year and the remaining life is greater than 10 years
D) 0.005 inch per year and the remaining life is greater than 10 years
Answer: D.....API 510, : On-stream Inspection in Lieu of Internal Inspections
[[Link] (b 1&2) ]

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

263. If the corrosion rate of a vessel is determined to be less than a given
amount per year, is it possible to exempt the vessel from internal inspection?
and, if possible, what is the value of the corrosion rate and the remaining life
that cannot be exceeded?
A) No, it is not possible to exempt a pressure vessel from internal inspection
B) Yes, and the corrosion rate must always be below 0.002” per year, and
remaining life greater than 5 years
C) Yes, and the corrosion rate must always be below 0.005” per year, and
remaining life greater than 10 years
D) Yes and the corrosion rate must always be below 0.008” per year, and
remaining life greater than 10 years
Answer: C.....API 510, : On-stream Inspection in Lieu of Internal Inspections
[[Link] (b 1&2) ]
=========================================================
264. A pressure vessel, in service for five years, has an annual corrosion rate
of less than 0.005 inches. In order to permit an on-stream inspection in lieu of
an internal inspection, all of the following requirements must be met except
that:
A) the vessel must not have a nonintegrally bonded liner such as strip lining
or plate lining.
B) No questionable condition is disclosed by periodic external inspections
C) The vessel will not be operated in excess of 500psi or 500°F
D) The operating temperature of the vessel must not exceed the lower
temperature limits for the creep rupture range of the vessel material
Answer: C.....API 510, : On-stream Inspection in Lieu of Internal Inspections
[[Link] (b 4,5&7) ]
=========================================================
265. If vessel entry is physically possible, on-stream inspection may possibly
be substituted for internal inspection if approved by Inspector & the vessel is
not subject to:
A) Stress Corrosion cracking or high temperature oxidation damage from the
service
B) Chloride Stress Corrosion cracking or Creep stress rupture damage from
the service
C) Environmental cracking or hydrogen damage from the fluid being handled
D) Damage Mechanisms requiring the Inspector to consult the Corrosion
Specialist
Answer: C.....API 510, : On-stream Inspection in Lieu of Internal Inspections
[[Link] (b 6) ]

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

266. A pressure vessel in service, If temperature in creep range suspected.
Which of the following is correct action?
A) an experienced metallurgist or engineer should be consulted.
B) Multiple thickness measurements shall be taken
C) Professional engineer must be consulted.
D) The authorized inspector must perform UT readings.
Answer: A.....API 510, : On-stream Inspection in Lieu of Internal Inspections
[[Link] (b 5) ] /API 572, [9.3.14]
=========================================================
267. If vessel entry is physically possible, on-stream inspection may possibly
be substituted for internal inspection if approved by Inspector and a 70 ksi
Carbon Steel vessel operating temperature does not exceed the lower
temperature limits for creep-rupture range at:
A) 650°F (343°C)
B) 700°F (371°C)
C) 800°F (427°C)
D) 850°F (454°C)
Answer: B.....API 510, : On-stream Inspection in Lieu of Internal Inspections
[[Link] (b 5) ] / API 571, [4.2.8 , table 4.2]
=========================================================
268. Assuming no RBI, if vessel entry is physically possible & all of the seven
conditions allowing an on-stream inspection to be done in lieu of an internal
inspection were not met, what must the Inspector do regarding scheduling of
the next inspection to be performed?
A) Next inspection shall be internal
B) Next inspection may be internal
C) Next inspection shall be On-Stream
D) Next inspection may be On-Stream
Answer: B.....API 510, : On-stream Inspection in Lieu of Internal Inspections
[[Link]]
=========================================================
269. When may an on-stream inspection be substituted for the internal
inspection?
A) when size or configuration makes vessel entry for internal inspection
physically impossible
B) when the general corrosion rate of a vessel is known to be less than 0.005
in. (0.125 mm) per year
C) when the vessel remaining life is greater than 10 years when the corrosive
character of the contents, including
D) the effect of trace components, has been established by at least five years
of the same or similar service

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

Answer: A.....API 510, : On-stream Inspection in Lieu of Internal Inspections
[[Link]]
=========================================================
270. Which of the following would allow for substituting on-stream inspection
for the internal inspection?
A) when the general corrosion rate of a vessel is known to be less than 0.005
in. (0.125 mm) per year
B) if an RBI assessment determines that risk associated with the vessel is
acceptably low with sufficient NDE
C) when the vessel remaining life is greater than 10 years
D) when the corrosive character of the contents, including the effect of trace
components, has been established by at least five years of the same or
similar service
Answer: B.....API 510, : On-stream Inspection in Lieu of Internal Inspections
[[Link]]
=========================================================
271. Which of these vessels in which internal inspection is physically possible,
but are in severe corrosive service, may not use an on-stream inspection as a
substitute for an internal inspection?
A) The recorded corrosion rate is 0.1 mm/year
B) The vessel is 3 years old
C) The vessel operates at 80 ºC
D) The vessel has no protective internal lining
Answer: B.....API 510, : On-stream Inspection in Lieu of Internal Inspections
[[Link] (b 3) ]
=========================================================
272. How would the internal inspection interval be determined for a large
pressure vessel with two or more zones differing corrosion rates?
A) The inspection interval for entire vessel should not exceed the estimated
remaining life based on the highest corrosion rate determined for any
zone.
B) The inspection interval is set for the entire vessels, based on the most
recent corrosion rate in the zone with the least reaming life
C) The inspection interval is set for the entire vessels, based on the highest
corrosion rate determined in any zone
D) The inspection interval for each zone may be set independently, based on
the corrosion rate for the particular zone
Answer: D.....API 510, : Multizone Vessels [6.5.3]

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

273. For a large vessel with two or more zones of differing corrosion rates,
how is the inspection interval determined?
A) The entire vessel shall be treated as one to determine the inspection
interval
B) each zone may be treated independently to determine the inspection
interval
C) at the inspector's discretion either each zone shall be treated
independently or the entire vessel as a whole shall be used to determine
the inspection interval, but not both
D) if the corrosion conditions are similar, then only one zone is required to
determine the inspection interval
Answer: B.....API 510, : Multizone Vessels [6.5.3]
=========================================================
274. Pressure-relieving devices should be inspected, tested and maintained in
accordance with ?
A) ASME VIII or the ‘applicable code’
B) API 576
C) API 572
D) API 520
Answer: B.....API 510, : Pressure-relieving Devices PRDs [6.6.1]
=========================================================
275. For Pressure-relieving Devices PRDs tested and repaired ,Each repair
organization shall have____
A) a fully documented QA process
B) a fully documented QC process
C) drawings and specification controls
D) requirements for material and part control
Answer: A.....API 510, : Pressure-relieving Devices PRDs [[Link]]
=========================================================
276. Which the following documents should Each repair organization have to
ensure that repair personnel are qualified within the scope of the Pressure-
relieving Devices PRDs repairs ?
A) a fully documented QA process
B) a fully documented QC process
C) a fully documented training program
D) requirements for material and part control
Answer: C.....API 510, : Pressure-relieving Devices PRDs [[Link]]
=========================================================
277. What is the maximum interval of pressure relief device testing in typical
process service?
A) One year
B) Five years

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

C) Ten years
D) Fifteen years
Answer: .....API 510, : Pressure-relieving Devices PRDs [[Link]]
=========================================================
278. The inspection interval for all pressure-relieving devices is determined
by________.
A) Pressure vessel engineer
C) Authorized inspector
D) Pressure vessel engineer and authorized inspector
D) either the inspector, engineer, or other qualified individual per the owner/
user’s QA system
Answer: D.....API 510, : Pressure-relieving Devices PRDs [[Link]]
=========================================================
279. What is the maximum interval of pressure relief device testing in typical
process service?
A) One year
B) Five years
C) Ten years
D) Fifteen years
Answer: B.....API 510, : Pressure-relieving Devices PRDs [[Link]]
=========================================================
280. If a RBI assessment is not performed, what is the greatest possible time
period allowed by API 510 between testing of pressure relieving devices?
A) At intervals frequent enough to verify valve’s reliable performance
B) 5 years (for normal process services) and 10 years (for non-corrosive
services)
C) 10 years (for normal process services) and 10 years (for non-corrosive
services)
D) At every shutdown or T &I or as deemed necessary by the authorized
inspector
Answer: B.....API 510, : Pressure-relieving Devices PRDs [[Link]]
=========================================================
281. What should the frequency of inspection for pressure relief devices be
based on?
A) The ASME code as it applies to relief devices
B) The manufacturer’s instructions
C) A frequency that verifies the device performs reliably in the particular
service conditions.
D) A five year frequency set by API-510
Answer: C.....API 510, : Pressure-relieving Devices PRDs [[Link]]

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

282. When calculating corrosion rates using API 510 formulas, which of the
following statements is FALSE regarding the value for t initial?
A) t initial is the initial thickness at the same CML as t actual in in. (mm).
B) t initial may be the first thickness measurement at this CML in in. (mm).
C) t initial may be the thickness at the start of a new corrosion rate
environment in in. (mm).
D) t initial is the initial thickness at a different CML from the one determining
the lowest t actual
Answer: D.....API 510, : Corrosion Rate Determination [[Link]]
=========================================================
283. long-term (LT) and short-term (ST) Corrosion Rates should be compared
(data assessment). When a significant difference exists between the two
rates, WHO selects which rate is to be used and WHY?
A) The inspector in consultation with a corrosion specialist and select the
corrosion rate that best reflects the current conditions..
B) The inspector in consultation with Engineer and select the corrosion rate
that best reflects the current conditions.
C) Corrosion Specialist alone selects a rate that best reflects current
conditions
D) Inspector alone selects a rate that best reflects current conditions.
Answer: A.....API 510, : Corrosion Rate Determination [[Link]]
=========================================================
284. A pressure vessel has been in service for 12 years and has a history of
corrosion over its service life. The original thickness was 1.9375 inches; the
current thickness is 1.405 inches. What is the corrosion rate for this vessel??
A) 0.011 inch per year
B) 0.011 mill per year
C) 0.044 inch per year
D) 0.044 mil per year
Answer: C.....API 510, : Corrosion Rate Determination [[Link]]
=========================================================
285. A vessel has been in service for five years and current thickness
measurements reveal the shell thickness to be 0.82” and inspection records
indicate the original thickness was 0.875”. What is the corrosion rate based
on the shell thickness provided?
A) 0.011 inch per year
B) 0.011 mill per year
C) 0.055 inch per year
D) 0.055 mil per year
Answer: A.....API 510, : Corrosion Rate Determination [[Link]]

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

286. What is the short term corrosion rate for a vessel whose inspection
records contain the following information for a TML?
A) 0.0025” (0.0635mm) per year
B) 0.005” (0.127mm) per year
C) 0.0075” (0.1905mm) per year
D) 0.010” (0.254mm) per year
Answer: C.....API 510, : Corrosion Rate Determination [[Link]]
=========================================================
287. Short-term corrosion rates are typically determined by:
A) The two most recent thickness readings
B) Any two sequential thickness readings
C) The two sequential readings showing the greatest corrosion
D) Any of the above, as the situation demands
Answer: A.....API 510, : Corrosion Rate Determination [[Link]]
=========================================================
288. What is the purpose of calculating both the short-term and long-term
corrosion rates for a pressure vessel?
A) to help the corrosion specialist determine the appropriate MAWP
B) to help the corrosion specialist determine rerating pressures
C) to help identify recent corrosion mechanisms from those acting over the
long-term
D) to help identify past corrosion mechanisms to determine whether pitting
or general corrosion will occur
Answer: C.....API 510, : Corrosion Rate Determination [[Link]]
=========================================================
289. What is the purpose of comparing the long-term and short-term
corrosion rates of a pressure vessel?
A) as part of the material cost estimate for repairs
B) as part of the data assessment
C) as part of the material cost estimate for replacement
D) as part of determining the required thickness
Answer: B.....API 510, : Corrosion Rate Determination [[Link]]
=========================================================
290. Who shall select the corrosion rate that best reflects the current
conditions?
A) the inspector
B) the engineer
B) corrosion specialist
D) the inspector in consultation with a corrosion specialist
Answer: D.....API 510, : Corrosion Rate Determination [[Link]]

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

291. For a new vessel, which one of the following methods shall be used to
determine the vessel's probable corrosion rate?
A) calculated from data collected by the owner/user on vessels operating in
the same or similar service
B) estimated by a corrosion specialist.
C) estimated from published data on vessels in same or similar service
D) all of the above
Answer: D.....API 510, : Newly Installed Pressure Vessels or Changes in Service
[7.1.2]
=========================================================
292. If the corrosion rate cannot be determined by calculation or experience,
onstream determination of a new Installation Pressure Vessel shall be made
after what period of time?
A) Three month
B) Six month
C) Five years
D) three to six months
Answer: D.....API 510, : Newly Installed Pressure Vessels or Changes in Service
[7.1.2]
=========================================================
293. When placing a new vessel in service, what would be a purpose of
reviewing previous inspection reports of a vessel in similar service?
A) Ensure estimated corrosion rates are accurate
B) Ensure pressure relief valves have been installed prior to placing the vessel
in service
C) Ensure required pressure tests have been performed
D) Thickness reading have been taken every 1000 hours of service
Answer: A.....API 510, : Newly Installed Pressure Vessels or Changes in Service
[7.1.2]
=========================================================
294. When the probable corrosion rate cannot be determined, how is the
corrosion rate determined for a vessel when the service conditions are
changed?
A) The owner/user’s metallurgist
B) On-stream corrosion data gathered after one month of service
C) On-stream corrosion data gathered after six weeks of service
D) On-stream corrosion data gathered after three to six months of service
Answer: D.....API 510, : Newly Installed Pressure Vessels or Changes in Service
[7.1.2]

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

295. Which of the following method for determining the corrosion rate for a
vessel?
A) The corrosion history of prior service.
B) Fitness of service evaluation.
C) Vessels in similar service.
D) Metallurgical sample
Answer: C.....API 510, : Newly Installed Pressure Vessels or Changes in Service
[7.1.2]
=========================================================
296. A new vessel is brought in to replace an old vessel being retired from a
hydrocarbon service after 25 years. The service will change to a new service
(extremely sour crude with no similar service published data anywhere) and
never handled before by owner/user. The new vessel’s probable corrosion rate
and resulting remaining life and inspection intervals are best determined by.
A) Corrosion rates may be estimated owner/user’s experience (old records) or
similar service.
B) Corrosion rates may be estimated from any published data regarding sour
crudes.
C) On-stream corrosion data gathered after three to six months of service.
D) None of these is correct.
Answer: C.....API 510, : Newly Installed Pressure Vessels or Changes in Service
[7.1.2]
=========================================================
297. After an inspection interval is completed and if calculations indicate that
an inaccurate rate of corrosion has been assumed initially, how do you
determine the corrosion rate for the next inspection period?
A) Nothing because the corrosion rate will be likely to keep changing again
and again
B) Make subsequent determinations at appropriate intervals until an accurate
rate is established
C) the corrosion rate in the remaining life calculations shall be changed to the
actual corrosion rate.
D) Consult the corrosion specialist to determine which rate to apply, ST or LT
Corrosion rate
Answer: C.....API 510, : Newly Installed Pressure Vessels or Changes in Service
[7.1.2]
=========================================================
298. A vessel has just changed service and no published or ‘similar service’
data are available to predict the probable corrosion rate under the new service
regime. What should the inspector do?
A) Specify the first internal inspection after 2190 hours to 4380 hours of
operation

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

B) Specify thickness measurements after 2190 hours to 4380 of operation
C) Assume a conservative corrosion rate of 0.5 mm per 2200 hours
D) Check the service conditions after 2200 hours to see if they are still the
same; then specify an internal inspection
Answer: B.....API 510, : Newly Installed Pressure Vessels or Changes in Service
[7.1.2]
=========================================================
299. The minimum required thickness of a vessel is calculated to be 0.55”,
current inspections determine it to be 0.82” thick, and it has a corrosion rate
of 0.015” per year. What is the remaining life of the vessel?
A) 18 years
B) 21.6 years
C) 10 years
D) 9 years
Answer: A.....API 510, : Remaining Life Calculations [7.2.1]
=========================================================
300. Based on the following, what is the remaining life of this pressure
vessel?
Original thickness 0.6875”
Actual thickness 0.638”
Minimum required thickness 0.513”
Corrosion rate 0.017” per year
A) 3.68 years
B) 5.13 years
C) 7.35 years
D) 10.26 years
Answer: C.....API 510, : Remaining Life Calculations [7.2.1]
=========================================================
301. Using the following data. calculate the remaining life of an air receiver:
installed :1971 New thickness: 0.825” (20.9mm) t minimum :0.500” (12.7mm)
Ultrasonic testing reading, 1979:0.825” (20.99mm) Ultrasonic testing
reading,1994:0.725” (18.4mm) Ultrasonic testing reading, 2004:0.625”
(15.9mm)
A) 1.25 years
B) 10 years
C) 12.5 years
D) 15.6 years
Answer: C.....API 510, : Remaining Life Calculations [7.2.1]

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

302. For this CML, we have multiple thickness readings taken at different
dates. Calculate the Remaining Life for the CML?
A) 30 years
B) 25 years
C) 20 years
D) 19.5 years
Answer: D.....API 510, : Remaining Life Calculations [7.2.1]
=========================================================
303. A vessel has been in service for five years and current thickness
measurements reveal the shell thickness to be 0.82” and inspection records
indicate the required thickness is 0.545”. What is the interval for the next
internal inspection of a vessel due if the corrosion rate is 0.018” per year?
A) 7.6 years
B) 9.1 years
C) 10 years
D) 15.2 years
Answer: A.....API 510, : Inspection Interval [[Link]/ 7.2.1]
=========================================================
304. What is the interval for the next internal inspection of a vessel with a
measured head thickness of 0.875”, a required thickness of 0.563”, and a
corrosion rate of 0.019” per year?
A) 4.1 years
B) 8.2 years
C) 10.0 years
D) 16.4 years
Answer: B.....API 510, : Inspection Interval [[Link]/ 7.2.1]
=========================================================
305. For this vessel, calculate the Next Inspection Date for the Internal
Inspection.?
A) February 2025
B) May 2025
C) Jun 2025
D) Nov 2025
Answer: A.....API 510, : Inspection Interval [[Link]/ 7.2.1]
=========================================================
306. which of the following statements is true?
A) Statistical analysis may not be applicable to vessels with random but
significant localized corrosion.
B) Statistical analysis may be applicable to vessels with random but
significant localized corrosion.
C) Statistical analysis may not be applicable to vessels with all corrosion area.
d) Statistical analysis is not permitted as per API 510

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

Answer: A.....API 510, : Remaining Life Calculations [7.2.2]
=========================================================
307. Statistical analysis may not be applicable to vessels with random but
significant localized corrosion. What is the correct action when use statistical
approach for assessment of substituting an internal inspection or for
determining the internal inspection interval ?
A) the inspector in consultation with a corrosion specialist
B) Care must be taken to ensure that the statistical treatment of data results
reflects the actual condition of the vessel section especially those subject to
localized corrosion.
C) Statistical analysis is not permitted as per API 510
D) None of the above.
Answer: B.....API 510, : Remaining Life Calculations [7.2.2]
=========================================================
308. When a vessel MAWP is recalculated, the wall thickness used for
computing the maximum allowable working pressure for continued service
shall be the :
A) Thickness of the original construction minus twice the estimated corrosion
loss before the date of the next inspection.
B) Actual thickness determined by inspection minus twice the estimated
corrosion loss before the date of the next inspection.
C) Actual thickness determined by inspection minus the estimated corrosion
loss before the date of the next inspection.
D) Actual thickness determined by inspection minus twice the estimated
corrosion loss the date of the next inspection.
Answer: B.....API 510, : (MAWP) Determination [7.3.3]
=========================================================
309. How shall the MAWP for the continued use of a pressure vessel be
calculated?
A) based on computations that are determined using the latest applicable
edition of the ASME Code
B) based on computations that are determined using the latest applicable
edition of the construction code to which the vessel was built
C) based on computations that are determined using API 510
D) both A or B
Answer: D.....API 510, : (MAWP) Determination [7.3.1]
=========================================================
310. What would be the thickness required for calculating the MAWP for
continued service of a pressure vessel made from ASME SA-516 Gr. 70, with an
original wall thickness of 0.500 in., original required minimum thickness of
0.400 in., an actual thickness of 0.475 in., a corrosion rate of 1.10 in./year,
and the next scheduled inspection interval of 5 years?

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

A) 0.250 in.
B) 0.375 in.
C) 0.425 in.
D) 0.450 in.
Answer: B.....API 510, : Thickness Required for Calculating MAWP [7.3.3]
=========================================================
311. In corrosive service the wall thickness used in the MAWP calculations
must be the actual thickness as determined by the inspection,________.?
A) Plus twice the estimated corrosion loss before the next inspection.
B) Minus twice the estimated corrosion loss before the next inspection.
C) Minus three times the estimated corrosion loss before the next inspection.
D) Plus four times the estimated corrosion loss before the next inspection
Answer: B.....API 510, : (MAWP) Determination [7.3.3]
=========================================================
312. When calculating the MAWP of a vessel after it is in service, the resulting
MAWP from these calculations cannot be higher than the original MAWP
unless,
A) The actual thickness as determined by inspection is used in calculations.
B) The actual thickness minus any expected corrosion loss before the next
inspection date is used in calculations.
C) The actual thickness is minus twice any expected corrosion loss before the
next inspection date is used in calculations.
D) A re-rating is performed per paragraph 8.2 of the API 510 Code.
Answer: D.....API 510, : (Determination [7.3.1]
=========================================================
313. If the actual thickness determined by inspection of the component is
greater or lesser than the thickness reported in the material test report or the
manufacturer’s data report, especially if the component was made by a
forming process. Which of the following is correct action?
A) Multiple thickness measurements shall be taken
B) Professional engineer must be consulted.
C) The authorized inspector must perform UT readings.
D) All of the above.
Answer: A.....API 510, : (MAWP) Determination [7.3.4]
=========================================================
314. A Pressure vessel with a 120 inch (305 centimeters) ID Is Being Inspected.
The inspector observes that the shall has thinned. the inspector should
evaluate the thinned area by averaging the shell thickness:
A) Reading over the most critical element of the thinned area over a length of
third the vessel’s diameter or 40 Inches (100 centimeters) whichever is
less
B) reading within an 8 inch 20(centimeters)diameters circle

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

C) measurement on either side of the Nozzle using thickness measurement
that do not extend within the limits of the reinforcement as defined in the
construction code.
D) readings over the most critical element of the thinned area over a length of
one half the vessel ‘s diameter or 20 inches (50centimeters) whichever is
less.
Answer: A.....API 510, : Evaluation of Locally Thinned Areas [[Link]]
=========================================================
315. A Pressure vessel with a 60 inch ID Is Being Inspected. The inspector
observes that the shall has thinned. the inspector should evaluate the thinned
area by averaging the shell thickness:
A) Reading over the most critical element of the thinned area over a length of
third the vessel’s diameter or 40 Inches (100 centimeters) whichever is
less
B) reading within an 8 inch 20(centimeters)diameters circle
C) measurement on either side of the Nozzle using thickness measurement
that do not extend within the limits of the reinforcement as defined in the
construction code.
D) readings over the most critical element of the thinned area over a length of
one half the vessel ‘s diameter or 20 inches (50centimeters) whichever is
less.
Answer: D.....API 510, : Evaluation of Locally Thinned Areas [[Link]]
=========================================================
316. During inspection of a vertical pressure vessel with an inside diameter of
60 in. (1500 mm), a generally corroded area (360 degrees around the ID of the
vessel and 1000 mm in height) was found in a shell near the inlet nozzle.
Remaining Wall thickness can be determined by:
A) Only by performing UT thickness on the area of the deepest pit &
measuring remaining wall
B) Averaging remaining wall thickness at equally spaced readings over a
length “L” = to 20 in.
C) Averaging remaining wall thickness at equally spaced readings over a
length “L” = to 30 in.
D) Averaging remaining wall thickness at equally spaced readings over a
length “L” = to 40 in.
Answer: B.....API 510, : Evaluation of Locally Thinned Areas [[Link]]
=========================================================
317. During inspection of a vertical pressure vessel with an inside diameter of
90 in. (2.25 meters), a generally corroded area (360° around the vessel ID and
40 inches in height) was found in a shell course indicating liquid line
corrosion. Remaining wall thickness can be determined by::

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

A) Only by performing UT thickness on the area of the deepest pit &
measuring remaining wall
B) Averaging remaining wall thickness at equally spaced readings over a
length “L” = to 20 in.
C) Averaging remaining wall thickness at equally spaced readings over a
length “L” = t 30 in.
D) Averaging remaining wall thickness at equally spaced readings over a
length “L” = to 40 in.
Answer: C.....API 510, : Evaluation of Locally Thinned Areas [[Link]]
=========================================================
318. A vessel with an ID of 54” has a corroded area of considerable size in
which circumferential stresses govern. The smallest measured thickness may
be averaged over a length of not more than:
A) 18 inches
B) 20 inches
C) 27 inches
D) 40 inches
Answer: B.....API 510, : Evaluation of Locally Thinned Areas [[Link]]
=========================================================
319. When evaluating a locally thinned area and averaging corrosion over a
length defined by API 510 rules (based on vessel ID), how are “averaged”
thickness readings spaced?
A) Readings shall be taken anywhere & shall be as many as deemed necessary
by an inspector
B) Readings shall be taken along a straight line using at least 5 measurements
as a minimum
C) Readings shall be taken along a straight line and there is no minimum
number required
D) Readings shall be taken along a straight line and equally spaced selected by
Inspector.
Answer: D.....API 510, : Evaluation of Locally Thinned Areas [[Link]]
=========================================================
320. A vessel has an inside diameter of 90 inches. What is the maximum
allowed averaging length for calculating corroded wall thickness?
A) 20 in
B) 30 in
C) 40 in
D) 48 in
Answer: B.....API 510, : Evaluation of Locally Thinned Areas [[Link]]

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

321. For a corroded area of considerable size, what is the maximum length
where thickness measurements can be averaged to determine the corrosion
rate for a pressure vessel with a 6 ft inside diameter?
A) 16 in.
B) 20 in.
C) 24 in.
D) 30 in.
Answer: C.....API 510, : Evaluation of Locally Thinned Areas [[Link]]
=========================================================
322.

Answer: B.....API 510, : Average Thickness for Locally Thinned Areas [[Link]/
[Link]]
=========================================================
323. A vessel has a locally thinned area in which circumferential stresses
govern .The length of the corroded area is 25 inches (635mm), and thickness
measurements along the most critical element of the groove are 0.700 inch
(17.8mm) ,0.400 inch(10.2mm), 0.300 inch (97.6mm),0.450 inch(11.4 mm),
0.600 inch (15.2mm), and 0.700 inch (17.8mm).The vessel diameter is 96
inches (2438 mm) and the required thickness is 0.604 inch (15.3mm).Which of
the following statement about the need for repair is correct?
A) Repairs are required; the length of the corroded area is acceptable, but the
average thickness below the required thickness
B) Repairs are required; the length of the corroded area is not acceptable, and
the average thickness is below the required thickness
C) Repairs are required; the length of the corroded area is not acceptable,
even though the average thickness is exceeds the required thickness
D) Repairs are required; the length of the corroded area is not acceptable and
the average thickness is exceeds the required thickness

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

Answer:- The maximum allowed averaging length = ⅓ x 96’’=32’ or 40”,
whichever is less= 32 inches.
The length of the corroded area is 25 inches < 32 inches The maximum
allowed averaging length
the length of the corroded area is acceptable
The average thickness = (0.700+ 0.400+ 0.300+ 0.450+ 0.600+ 0.700) / 6 =
0.525
the average thickness < 0.604 inch the required thickness
Repairs are required
Answer: A.....API 510, : Average Thickness for Locally Thinned Areas [[Link]/
[Link]]
=========================================================
324. A Vessel undergoing an API 510 internal inspection has a corroded area
whose minimum average remaining thickness is 0.90 inch(22.9mm). The
required minimum thickness of the vessel for the anticipated service is 1.0
inches (25.4 mm). the nominal thickness of the vessel is 1.3 inches (33.0 mm)
and there is no evidence of corrosion, thinning, or cracking elsewhere in the
vessel. The corrosion rate in the damage area is estimated to be 0.01 inch per
year (0.254mm /year). The owner/user desires to keep the vessel in service
for 10 years before the next required inspection, which statement is most
appropriated?
A) The local thin area must be restored to a nominal metal thickness of 1.10
inch(27.9mm)
B) The local thin area must be restored to adnominal metal thickness of 1.20
inch(30.5mm)
C) The local thin area must be restored to adnominal metal thickness of 1.30
inch(33.0mm)
D) API 510 does not permit restoration of a corroded area whose remaining
thickness is less than the required minimum thickness
Answer: C.....API 510, : Average Thickness for Locally Thinned Areas [[Link]/
[Link]]
=========================================================
325. When evaluating locally thinned areas as part of a fitness for service
analysis of corroded regions in a pressure vessel, if circumferential stresses
govern, which is typical for most vessels, how shall the thickness readings be
taken ?
A) along a circumferential length of the pressure vessel
B) along a longitudinal length of the pressure vessel
C) at a 45 angle to the principle stress direction in the pressure vessel
D) at a 30 angle to the principle stress direction in the pressure vessel
Answer: B.....API 510, : Average Thickness for Locally Thinned Areas [[Link]]

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

326. For an internally pressurized cylindrical vessel shell with no significant
induced bending stresses (e.g. wind loads) corrosion is usually averaged
along which plane?
A) Circumferential
B) Axial (longitudinal)
C) Radial
D) Any plane containing the worst average corrosion
Answer: B.....API 510, : Average Thickness for Locally Thinned Areas [[Link]]
=========================================================
327. When evaluating locally thinned areas as part of a fitness for service
analysis of corroded regions in a pressure vessel, if longitudinal stresses
govern because of wind loads and structural supports, how shall the thickness
readings be taken??
A) at a 45 angle to the principle stress direction in the pressure vessel
B) at a 30 angle to the principle stress direction in the pressure vessel
C) along a circumferential length of the pressure vessel
D) along a longitudinal length of the pressure vessel
Answer: C.....API 510, : Average Thickness for Locally Thinned Areas [[Link]]
=========================================================
328. When evaluating locally thinned areas near a nozzle as part of a fitness
for service analysis of corroded regions in a pressure vessel, what restriction
does API 510 place on the designated length when performing corrosion
averaging ?
A) the length shall extend to the fillet weld of the reinforcement, as defined in
the construction code
B) the length shall extend to 1/2 distance of the reinforcement pad
C) the length shall extend to the nozzle component that is being reinforced
D) the length shall not extend within the limits of the reinforcement as
defined in the construction code
Answer: D.....API 510, : Average Thickness for Locally Thinned Areas [[Link]]

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

329.

Answer: C.....API 510, : Evaluation of Pitting [7.4.3]

=========================================================
330. Critical Environmental Factors for CUI can include all of the following
EXCEPT:
A. Insulation system design & type
B. Humidity & Rainfall
C. Chlorides from Marine Environment
D. Industrial pollution (SO², etc)
Answer: A … API 571, Par. [Link] (j)… Corrosion Under Insulation (CUI
Critical Factors
=========================================================
331. At low enough flue gas temperature, the sulfur dioxide, sulfur trioxide,
and hydrogen chloride will condense to form sulfurous acid, sulfuric acid,
hydrochloric acid which can lead to:
A. Cracking
B. Grooving
C. Severe corrosion
D. Brittle fracture
Answer: C… API 571,
=========================================================
332. A 48” inside diameter vessel has a nominal thickness of 0.75” and the
minimum required thickness is 0.68”. Inspection revealed, three pits in the
vessel shell: Pit #1 1.5” X 0.25” X 0.25” deep ,Pit #2 1” diameter X 0.36” deep
,Pit #3 0.5 ” X 0.75 X 0.125 ‘’ deep, The pits are all located in a 6 inch diameter
circle with the sum of their dimensions along a straight line is 1.9375”. Which
of the following statements is true ?

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

A) The pits are acceptable because small, widely scattered pits may be
ignored

B) The pits are acceptable, based on their area, length, and depth
C) The pits are not acceptable, based on their length
D) The pits are not acceptable based on their area, length, and depth
Answer: B.....API 510, : Evaluation of Pitting [7.4.3]
=========================================================
333. As a general rule, the design stress used for an ASME VIII division 2
appendix 4 assessment (when used as an alternative to API 510) is:
A) 2/3 minimum specified yield strength
B) 1/2 minimum specified yield strength
C) 1/3 minimum specified yield strength
D) 2/3 minimum specified ultimate tensile strength
Answer: A.....API 510, : Alternative Evaluation Methods for Thinning [[Link] ]
=========================================================
334. Why is it important to blend ground areas where defects have been
removed in an operating pressure vessel?
A) to ensure that the defects are removed
B) to minimize stress concentration effects
C) to eliminate stress concentration effects
D) to minimize metal removal (thinning)
Answer: B.....API 510, : Alternative Evaluation Methods for Thinning [[Link] ]
=========================================================
335. When using the design by analysis methods in ASME Section VIII,
Division 2 or API 579 for evaluating thinning below the required thickness in
an operating pressure vessel, who shall perform the analysis?
a) an inspector
b) an engineer
c) an inspector or engineer
d) an inspector in consultation with an engineer
Answer: B.....API 510, : Alternative Evaluation Methods for Thinning [[Link] ]
=========================================================
336. An Alternative Evaluation Methods for Thinning , components with
thinning below the required thickness may be evaluated by
A) employing the design by analysis methods of ASTM Code
B) employing the design by analysis methods of ASME Code, Section VIII,
Division 1
C) employing the design by analysis methods of ASME Code, Section VIII,
Division 2
D) Not permitted
Answer: C.....API 510, : Alternative Evaluation Methods for Thinning [[Link] ]

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

337. An inspector is evaluating a longitudinal weld in a pressure vessel that
has been corroded, as part of a fitness for service analysis. The pressure
vessel is 7 ft in diameter , 42 ft long, made from ASME SA-516 Gr 70
normalized and tempered, with a required wall thickness of 0.750 in., and
operates at 1,100 psi and 550°F. What is the minimum total width of the
surface away from the weld that must be evaluated?
A) 1.50 in.
B) 3.00 in.
C) 5.00 in.
D) 7.25 in.
Answer: B.....API 510, : Joint Efficiency Adjustments [7.4.5 ]
=========================================================
338. A pressure vessel has a joint efficiency of 85% and a locally corroded
area away from the weld . How far away from the weld must the corroded
area be in order to allow a joint efficiency of 100% in recalculating the
required thickness ?
A) ½ inch (1.3 cm) or 2 times the minimum required thickness, whichever is
greater.
B) 1 inch (2.5 cm) or 2 times the minimum required thickness, whichever is
greater.
C)1inch (1.3 cm) or 3 times the minimum required thickness, whichever is
greater.
D)2 inch (1.3 cm) or 3 times the minimum required thickness, whichever is
greater.
Answer: B.....API 510, : Joint Efficiency Adjustments [7.4.5 ]
=========================================================
339. What can be done to extend the life of a 2” thickness vessel with a
corroded area in the shell plate 6 inches from the weld, a joint efficiency of
less than 1, and a corrosion thickness currently near the minimum required
thickness?
A) Recalculate t minimum for current operating conditions using E < 1.
B) Recalculate t minimum for current operating conditions using E = 1.
C) Recalculate t minimum for design conditions using E = 1.
D) Monitor the thickness during the run.
Answer: C.....API 510, : Joint Efficiency Adjustments [7.4.5 ]
=========================================================
340. How far away from the weld must the corroded area be in order to allow
a joint efficiency of 100% in recalculating the required thickness of a vessel
with a joint efficiency of 85%?
A) The greater of one half inch or two times the minimum required thickness
B) The greater of one inch or two times the minimum required thickness
C) The greater of one inch or three times the minimum required thickness

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

D) The greater of two inches or three times the minimum required thickness
Answer: B.....API 510, : Joint Efficiency Adjustments [7.4.5 ]
=========================================================
341. When evaluating welds as part of a fitness for service analysis of
corroded regions in a pressure vessel, how is the amount of surface at the
weld determined?
a) the surface at a weld includes 1 in. on either side of the weld (measured
from the toe)
b) the surface at a weld includes twice the required thickness on either side of
the weld (measured from the toe)
c) the surface at a weld includes 1 in. on either side of the weld (measured
from the toe) or twice the required thickness on either side of the weld,
whichever is greater
d) the surface at a weld includes 1 in. on either side of the weld (measured
from the toe) or twice the required thickness on either side of the weld,
whichever is less
Answer: C.....API 510, : Joint Efficiency Adjustments [7.4.5 ]
=========================================================
342. When evaluating a corroded area in a 3:1 ellipsoidal head as part of a
fitness for service analysis of corroded regions in a pressure vessel,
determine the radius to use in the hemi-spherical head formula where the
material is ASME SA-516 Gr 70 in the as-rolled condition, shell inside
diameter is 8 ft, required wall thickness is 0.500 in. with a corrosion
allowance of 0.100 in., and operating at 1,000 psi and 575°F?
A) 86.580 in.
B) 130.560 in.
C) 130.832 in.
D) 96.000 in.
Answer: C.....API 510, : the central portion of the head [7.4.6 ]
=========================================================
343. An ellipsoidal head has an internal diameter of 80 inches and depth of 22
inches (including a straight face dimension of 2 inches). What should its
spherical (crown) radius be?
A) 76.9 inches
B) 72.0 inches
C) 68.4 inches
D) All of the above
Answer: B.....API 510, : the central portion of the head [7.4.6 ]

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

344. The crown portion for torispherical head ( ID=40 inches) may be
considered as the portion lying entirely within a circle whose center will be
same as head centre and diameter will be ?
A) 36’’
B) 40’’
C) 32’’
D) 200’’
Answer: C.....API 510, : the central portion of the head [7.4.6 ]
=========================================================
345. Regarding Fitness for Service Analysis of Corroded areas in heads
(assume an ellipsoidal head is corroded in the knuckle region), the thickness
required can be determined by using the ASME Section VIII, Div. 1
Construction Code formula for:
A) Ellipsoidal head thickness
B) Torispherical head thickness
C) Hemispherical head thickness and you must also use the API 510 Table
D) None of these are correct
Answer: A.....API 510, : the central portion of the head [[Link] ]
=========================================================
346. To determine minimum required thickness of an ellipsoidal head
severely corroded in its central region, the Inspector must use which ASME
Section VIII, Div. 1 Code formula?
A) Ellipsoidal head thickness calculation.
B) Torispherical head thickness calculation
C) Hemispherical head thickness calculation
D) None of these are correct
Answer: C.....API 510, : the central portion of the head [[Link] ]
=========================================================
347. For torispherical heads, the central portion can be assumed to be a
hemisphere of radius equal to:
A) The shell radius
B) The head knuckle radius
C) The head crown radius
D) The shell inner diameter
Answer: C.....API 510, : corroded areas in vessel heads [[Link] ]
=========================================================
348. For ellipsoidal heads the central portion can be assumed to be a
hemisphere of radius equal to:
A) The head inner radius x factor K1
B) The head crown radius x factor K1
C) Shell inside diameter x factor K1
D) Shell outside radius x factor K1

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

Answer: C.....API 510, : corroded areas in vessel heads [[Link] ]
=========================================================
349. When evaluating heads as part of a fitness for service analysis of
corroded regions in a pressure vessel, what formula would be used to
determine the required thickness of a ellipsoidal and torispherical heads if
the corrosion is in the central portion of the head:
A) the ellipsoidal head formula in ASME Sec. VIII Div. 1
B) the ellipsoidal head formula in the construction code
C) the hemi-spherical head formula in the construction code
D) the torispherical head formula in ASME Sec. VIII Div. 1
Answer: C.....API 510, : corroded areas in vessel heads [[Link] ]
=========================================================
350. When evaluating heads as part of a fitness for service analysis of
corroded regions in a pressure vessel, what formula would be used to
determine the required thickness of a torispherical head if the corrosion is in
the central portion of the head?
A) the ellipsoidal head formula in ASME Sec. VIII Div. 1
B) the ellipsoidal head formula in the construction code
C) the torispherical head formula in ASME Sec. VIII Div. 1
D) the hemi-spherical head formula in the construction code
Answer: D.....API 510, : corroded areas in vessel heads [[Link] ]
=========================================================
351. The effect of corrosion near the center of vessel heads is calculated under
API 510 using?
A) The exact formulae used in ASME VIII-1
B) The pitting assessment methodology set out in API 510 section 7.4.2
C) Equations cross-referenced from API 579
D) Approximation, to rules set out in API 510 section7.4.6
Answer: D.....API 510, : corroded areas in vessel heads [7.4.6 ]
=========================================================
352. When Inspectors are working on code calculations (Required Thickness
Determinations), they must know which of the following statements is TRUE
regarding rules for t required.
A) Required thickness shall be based on pressure considerations using the
appropriate design formula and code allowable stress values
B) Required thickness shall be based on pressure and structural
considerations using appropriate design formulas and code allowable
stress values
C) Required thickness shall be based on pressure, mechanical, and structural
considerations using the appropriate design formulas and code allowable
stress values
D) Required thickness shall be based on pressure, mechanical and structural

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

considerations using any design formulas and stress values
Answer: C.....API 510, : Required Thickness Determination [7.6]
=========================================================
353. For Pressure vessels that have no name plate or no design and
construction documentation which of the following may be used to verify
operating integrity.
A) Use allowable stress of SA - 283 Gr C if material of vessel is unknown.
B) Use joint factor of 0.7 for butt welds
C) Use stress values from current ASME code for any vessel designed earlier
than 1999.
D) both (A) and (B)
Answer: D.....API 510, : Evaluation of Existing Equipment with Minimal
Documentation. [7.7]
=========================================================
354. When the extent of radiography originally performed is not known for
joint type 1?
A) use joint efficiency of 0.65.
B) use joint efficiency of 0.7.
C) use joint efficiency of 0.85.
D) use joint efficiency of 1.
Answer: B.....API 510, : Evaluation of Existing Equipment with Minimal
Documentation. [7.7]
=========================================================
355. For a pressure vessel constructed in 1970 having no nameplate and
minimal design and construction documentation, which of the following is a
correct action to be taken for calculation ?
A) Use allowable stress values of the 1999 Addenda (based on current design
factors)
B) Use allowable stress values from Code Case 2290 (based on current design
factors)
C) Use allowable stress values of the current ASME Code (based on design
factor of 3.5)
D) Use allowable stress values assuming the steel is A283 Gr.C.
Answer: D.....API 510, : Evaluation of Existing Equipment with Minimal
Documentation. [7.7]
=========================================================
356. According to API 510, owner/user shall maintain piping records that are:
A) Consistent
B) Temporary
C) Clear and concise
D) Permanent and progressive
Answer: D.....API 510, : Reports and Records. [7.8.1]

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

357. Progressive records must be regularly updated and include new
information pertinent to all of the following items except:
A) Personnel Safety history with the equipment
B) Maintenance history of the equipment
C) Operational history of the equipment
D) Inspection history of the equipment
Answer: A.....API 510, : Reports and Records. [7.8.2]
=========================================================
358. What is/are the minimum API Code requirements for maintaining
records of thickness measurements for pressure vessels?
A) Keeping records of the last thickness measurements
B) Keeping records of the thickness measurement controlling the corrosion
rate
C) Keeping progressive records of the thickness measurement of the thinnest
component
D) Keeping progressive records of all thickness measurements
Answer: D.....API 510, : Reports and Records. [7.8.1]
=========================================================
359. Pressure vessel and pressure-relieving device records shall contain four
types of information pertinent to mechanical integrity. Which of the following
is not part of records?
A) Construction and design information.
B) Inspection history.
C) Repair, alteration, and rerating information.
D) Fitness for service assessment plans and strategies
Answer: D.....API 510, : Reports and Records. [7.8.2]
=========================================================
360. All repairs and alterations to pressure vessels shall be performed by a
repair organization in accordance with____.
A) ASME Section VIII, Divisions 1
B) ASME Section VIII, Divisions 2
C) ASME Section VIII, Divisions 1 and 2
D) the applicable principles of the ASME Code or the applicable construction
or repair code
Answer: D.....API 510, : Repairs and Alterations [8.1.1 General]
=========================================================
361. All repair and alteration work shall be authorized by _______before the
work is started by a repair organization.
A) the inspector
B) inspector or engineer
C) Owner/user
D) Construction contractor

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

Answer: A.....API 510, : Repairs and Alterations [8.1.2 Authorization]
=========================================================
362. When may a crack in a welded joint be repaired by welding?
A) Only after nondestructive testing and inspection has been performed
B) Only after a fitness for service analysis has been conducted
C) Only after hydrogen bake out of the area is completed
D) Only after obtaining authorization by the inspector
Answer: D.....API 510, : Repairs and Alterations [8.1.2 Authorization]
=========================================================
363. API authorized inspectors may give prior authorization for routine
repairs not involving:
A) Pressure tests
B) Radiography
C) Pneumatic testing
D) Final visual inspections
Answer: A.....API 510, : Repairs and Alterations [8.1.2 Authorization]
=========================================================
364. The inspector shall approve all specified repair and alteration work at
designated hold points and after completion of the work in accordance with
the:
A) Repair plan
B) Inspection Plan
C) QA Plan
D) QC Plan
Answer: A.....API 510, : Repairs and Alterations [[Link] Approval ]
=========================================================
365. materials used in repairs vessel shall:
A) Be of known weldable quality and be compatible with the original material
of pressure vessel.
B) Be of known toughness
C) Have a minimum tensile strength of 50,000psi
D) Have an ASTM specification number
Answer: A.....API 510, : Repairs and Alterations [8.1.5 Material]
=========================================================
366. In addition to being of known weldable quality, materials used for
making repairs shall:
A) Be compatible with the original material
B) Be of known toughness
C) Have a minimum tensile strength of 50,000psi
D) Have an ASTM specification number
Answer: A.....API 510, : Repairs and Alterations [8.1.5 Material]

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

367. What is the maximum permitted carbon content when welding carbon
and low-alloy steels?
a) 0.15%
b) 0.25%
c) 0.35%
d) 0.45%
Answer: C.....API 510, : Repairs and Alterations [8.1.5 Material]
=========================================================
368. Materials used for welded repairs and alterations have Carbon or alloy
steel with carbon content over 0.35 % shall______________
A) not be welded
B) need special attention and preheating to avoid weld cracking
C) be welded
D) not need special attention and preheating.
Answer: A.....API 510, : Repairs and Alterations [8.1.5 Material]
=========================================================
369. When should temporary repairs be removed and replaced with suitable
permanent repairs?
A) within 1 month of the temporary repair
B) within 6 months of the temporary repair
C) at the next available maintenance opportunity
D) as required by the inspector
Answer: C.....API 510, : Temporary Repairs [[Link].1]
=========================================================
370. Temporary repairs to pressure vessels:
A) Must be replaced with permanent repairs during the next scheduled
shutdown
B) May remain in place for longer periods if approved by the pressure vessel
engineer
C) May remain in place for longer periods if approved by the API pressure
vessel inspector
D) May remain in place if approved by the pressure vessel engineer and the
API pressure vessel inspector.
Answer: D.....API 510, : Temporary Repairs [[Link].1]
=========================================================
371. What is required when documenting temporary repairs that may remain
in place for a longer period of time past the next available maintenance
opportunity?
A) location of the temporary repair and specific details about the repair
B) details of analyses performed and requirements for future inspections
C) due date for installing permanent repair
D) all of the above

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

Answer: D.....API 510, : Temporary Repairs [[Link].1]
=========================================================
372. Documentation of temporary repairs includes all of the following
EXCEPT:
A) Due date for installing a permanent repair
B) Plans to make a temporary repair permanent
C) Location of temporary repairs and specific repair details
D) Details of analyses performed and future inspection requirements
Answer: B.....API 510, : Temporary Repairs [[Link].1]
=========================================================
373. If the requirements of API 510 are met who determines if a temporary
fillet weld patch may be used in a repair?
A) An engineer and API authorized inspector
B) The API authorized inspector
C) A repair concern that holds a valid NBIC R stamp
D) The engineer
Answer: A.....API 510, : Temporary Repairs [[Link].1]
=========================================================
374. What type of repair is a fillet-welded patch placed on damaged, corroded,
or eroded areas of pressure vessel components?
A) a permanent repair
B) a temporary repair
C) a code repair
D) a jurisdictional repair
Answer: B.....API 510, : Fillet-welded Patches [[Link].2]
=========================================================
375. When installing a fillet-welded patch adjacent to an existing fillet-welded
patch, the distance between the toes of the fillet weld shall not be less than:
A) 4 x the square root of (vessel inside radius x actual vessel wall thickness
under the patch)
B) 2 x the square root of (vessel inside radius x actual vessel wall thickness
under the patch)
C) 2 x the square root of (vessel inside radius x nominal vessel wall thickness
under the patch)
D) 4 x the square root of (vessel inside radius x nominal vessel wall thickness
under the patch)
Answer: A.....API 510, : Fillet-welded Patches [[Link].2.3]
=========================================================
376. When installing a fillet-welded patch adjacent to an existing fillet-welded
patch, the distance between the toes of the fillet weld shall not be less than:
Given: Inside Vessel Radius = 39 inches and the actual wall thickness = 0.750
inches

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

A) 12 inches
B) 22 inches
C) 29 inches
D) None of these
Answer: B.....API 510, : Fillet-welded Patches [[Link].2.3]
=========================================================
377. When installing a fillet-welded patch adjacent to an existing fillet-welded
patch, the distance between the toes of the fillet weld shall not be less than:
Given: Inside Vessel diameter = 96 inches and the actual wall thickness = .750
inches
A) 32 inches
B) 24 inches
C) 26 inches
D) 8 inches
Answer: B.....API 510, : Fillet-welded Patches [[Link].2.3]
=========================================================
378. When shall a fillet-welded patch not be used to repair a corroded area in
a pressure vessel?
A) parallel to an existing fillet-welded patch in the longitudinal direction
B) Installed on top of an existing fillet-welded patch
C) for vessels smaller than 4 ft in diameter
D) for vessels over 10 ft in diameter
Answer: B.....API 510, : Fillet-welded Patches [[Link].3]
=========================================================
379. What should the inspector check for regarding the installation of a fillet
welded patch plate on the exterior of a pressure vessel?
a) Reinforcement plate is internally inspected at the API-510 recommended
intervals
b) Re-rating nameplate is correctly stamped and attached
c) Patch is accepted by the jurisdiction and the design is approved by an
engineer
d) Efficiency of the attachment is identical to that of the original fabrication
Answer: C.....API 510, : Fillet-welded Patches [[Link].2]
=========================================================
380. What type of pressure vessel damage is an inspector not allowed to
repair by using a fillet-welded patch?
A) general corrosion
B) pitting corrosion
C) stress corrosion cracking
D) hydrogen blisters
Answer: C.....API 510, : Fillet-welded Patches [[Link].2.1]

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

381. Repairs of cracks in a vessel section are permitted with approval by the
inspector provided which of the following is also done?
A) The weld is fully radiographed (RT)
B) The weld is post weld heat treated (PWHT)
C) The weld is PWHT and fully examined using RT
D) An engineer is consulted.
Answer: D.....API 510, : Fillet-welded Patches [[Link].2.1]
=========================================================
382. Crack in a vessel at cone to cylinder juncture can be repaired , provided
that__
A) Weld is fully RT
B) PWHT weld
C) PWHT weld and 100% RT
D) Engineer expected is consulted
Answer: D.....API 510, : Fillet-welded Patches [[Link].2.1]
=========================================================
383. Fillet-welded patch plates shall have rounded corners with __
A) a minimum radius of 1 in. (25 mm) minimum radius
B) a minimum radius of 2 in. (50 mm) minimum radius
C) double the pipe thickness
D) 1.5 times the minimum stress of original material
Answer: A.....API 510, : Fillet-welded Patches [[Link].2.4]
=========================================================
384. When shall a full encirclement lap band not be used to repair a corroded
area in a pressure vessel?
A) parallel to an existing fillet-welded patch in the longitudinal direction
B) for vessels smaller than 4 ft in diameter
C) for vessels over 10 ft in diameter
D) covering a crack in the vessel shell
Answer: D.....API 510, : Lap Band Repairs [[Link].3]
=========================================================
385. Who will give approval for lap band repair ?
A) An engineer and API authorized inspector
B) The API authorized inspector
C) A repair concern that holds a valid NBIC R stamp
D) The engineer
Answer: A.....API 510, : Lap Band Repairs [[Link].3]
=========================================================
386. The design of a full encirclement lap band repair is approved and
documented by_______
A) An engineer and API authorized inspector
B) The API authorized inspector

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

C) A repair concern that holds a valid NBIC R stamp
D) The engineer
Answer: A.....API 510, : Lap Band Repairs [[Link].3]
=========================================================
387. Regarding to Lap Band Repairs , if the band material and weld metal are
not suitable for contact with the contained fluid .which of the following is
correct?
A) the band material shall approved by engineer and API authorized inspector
B) shall be evaluated in consultation with an engineer or corrosion specialist,
depending on the type of repair.
C) Shall not be welded.
D) None of the above .
Answer: C.....API 510, : Lap Band Repairs [[Link].3]
=========================================================
388. When using a non-penetrating nozzle as a permanent pressure vessel
repair, what material criteria need to be addressed?
A) the material shall be suitable for the design conditions
B) the material shall be suitable for contact with the contained fluid at the
design conditions and an appropriate corrosion allowance shall be
provided
C) the material shall meet ASME Sec. Parts A or B requirements
D) the material shall of weldable quality and verified by PMI .
Answer: B.....API 510, : No penetrating Nozzles [[Link].4]
=========================================================
389. According to API 510 , Pipe Cap over pressure vessel damage_____
A) Can only used if pipe cap was thickness corresponding to XXS or grater.
B) may be used as permanent repairs for other than cracks when the design
and method of attachment comply with the applicable requirements of the
appropriate code.
C) may be used as temporary repair repairs until permeant repair can
effective at next available maintenance opportunity .
D) Are prohibited as a means of temporary or permeant repair .
Answer: B.....API 510, : No penetrating Nozzles [[Link].4]
=========================================================
390. If there is crack in a pressure vessel , which of the following is correct
for repairing crack?
A) can repair only used if pipe cap was thickness corresponding to XXS or
grater.
B) can repair with Nonpenetrating Nozzles .
C) cannot repair with Nonpenetrating Nozzles .
D) Are prohibited to repair as a means of temporary or permeant repair
Answer: C.....API 510, : Nonpenetrating Nozzles [[Link].4]

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

391. Typical permanent repair techniques include all of the following EXCEPT:
A) Excavating a defect and contour blend-grinding per API 579
B) Excavating a defect and repair welding the excavation
C) Replacing an entire section or component containing defects
D) Lap Band and Weld overlays of corroded areas
Answer: D.....API 510, : Permanent Repair [[Link].2 ] / Lap Band Repairs
[[Link].3]
=========================================================
392. When using an insert patch to permanently repair a corrosion region in a
pressure vessel, what type of weld is required?
A) partial-penetration groove weld
B) full-penetration groove weld
C) full-penetration fillet weld
D) partial-penetration fillet weld
Answer: B.....API 510, : Permanent Repair [[Link].2 Insert Plates]
=========================================================
393. When using an insert patch to permanently repair a corrosion region in a
pressure vessel, All insert plate corners that do not extend to an existing
longitudinal or horizontal weld shall be_______
A) rounded having a 1 in. (25 mm) minimum radius
B) rounded having a 2 in. (25 mm) minimum radius
C) double the pipe thickness
D) 1.5 times the minimum stress of original material
Answer: A.....API 510, : Permanent Repair [[Link].2 Insert Plates]
=========================================================
394. Per API 510, Insert (flush) patches may be used under all of the following
circumstances EXCEPT:
A) When Full-penetration groove welds are used
B) When RT or UT is per Inspection approved procedures
C) When all insert plate corners extend to an existing longitudinal or
horizontal weld
D) When all insert plate corners are rounded with a 2 - inch minimum radius
Answer: D.....API 510, : Permanent Repair [[Link].2 Insert Plates]
=========================================================
395. A pressure vessel made from ASME SA-516 Gr. 70 has a corroded region
that will be repaired by welding using a filler metal with that has a MSTS of
60,000 psi. What is the minimum required thickness of the repair weld if the
depth of base metal lost by corrosion and weld preparation is 0.375 in.?
Answer: .....API 510, : Repair Weld Thickness [[Link].2]

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

396. A pressure vessel made from S.S cladding base metal has strength of
17700 psi and thickness of 0.75" has a corroded region that will be repaired by
welding using a filler metal with that has a MSTS of 16600 psi. What is the
minimum required thickness of the repair weld if the depth of base metal lost
by corrosion and weld preparation is =0.25" in.?
A) 0.235 in.
B) 0.255 in.
C) 0.266 in.
D) 0.366 in.
Answer: C.....API 510, : Repair Weld Thickness [[Link].2]
=========================================================
397. If a rapier is made on a pressure vessel using a filler material with a
lower specified minimum tensile strength than the base metal, all of the
following requirements apply except:
A) The rapier shall be made with a minimum of two passes
B) The increased Thickness of the repair shall have rounded corners and blend
into the base metal using a 3-to-1 taper.
C) a minimum preheat of 175˚ F (79.4˚C) and an Interpass temperature of
450˚F(232˚C) to be maintained.
D) The rapier thickness shall not be more than 50% of the required base
metal thickness. excluding corrosion allowance
Answer: C.....API 510, : Filler Metal Strength for Overlay and Repairs to
Existing Welds [[Link]]
=========================================================
398. Who is responsible for reviewing and approving the repair procedures to
restore removed, corroded, or missing clad or overlay areas in a pressure
vessel?
A) the inspector
B) the engineer
C) the engineer and inspector
D) the inspector in consultation with the engineer
Answer: C.....API 510, : Repairs to Stainless Steel Weld Overlay and Cladding
[[Link].1 ]
=========================================================
399. Who is responsible for developing the repair plan for pressure vessels
that operate in hydrogen service at elevated temperatures?
A) the inspector
B) the engineer
C) the engineer and inspector
D) the inspector in consultation with the engineer
Answer: B.....API 510, : Repairs to Stainless Steel Weld Overlay and Cladding
[[Link].1 ]

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

400. Which of the following is most important when performing weld repairs
to a section of stainless steel weld overlay on a carbon steel vessel in
hydrogen service?
A) Magnetic particle examination of the overlay
B) Brinell hardness testing of the overlay
C) outgassing base metal
D) Impact testing of the base metal
Answer: C.....API 510, : Repairs to Stainless Steel Weld Overlay and Cladding
[[Link].3]
=========================================================
401. After repair welding a cladded pressure vessel that operates in hydrogen
service at elevated temperatures and after cooling the weld to ambient
temperatures,
what type of inspection is required?
A) the repair shall be inspected by VT
B) the repair shall be inspected by PT
C) the repair shall be inspected by the UT
D) the repair shall be inspected by radiography or UT if approved by the
inspector
Answer: B.....API 510, : Repairs to Stainless Steel Weld Overlay and Cladding
[[Link].4]
=========================================================
402. A stainless steel weld overlay is repaired on a vessel fabricated from
[Link].5. t material. This is the base metal in the rapier area should be
examined for cracking by which type of examination ?
A) Ultrasonic
B) Radiography
C) Liquid penetrant
D) magnetic particle
Answer: A.....API 510, : Repairs to Stainless Steel Weld Overlay and Cladding
[[Link].4]
=========================================================
403. A weld overlay is done for a repair on a vessel fabricated of P-5 material.
The next day, the base metal, in the repair area, should be examined for
cracking by which type of examination?
a) Ultrasonic
b) Radiography
c) Liquid penetrant
d) Magnetic Particle
Answer: A.....API 510, : Repairs to Stainless Steel Weld Overlay and Cladding
[[Link].4]

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

404. After repair welding a pressure vessel made from ASME SA-387 Gr. 22
and cladded with UNS S30403 that operates in hydrogen service at elevated
temperatures and after cooling the weld to ambient temperatures, when
should the inspection be performed?
a) immediately after the completed repairs
b) within 2 - 4 hours after the completed repairs
c) following a delay of at least 24 hours after completed repairs
d) following a delay of at least 48 hours after completed repairs
Answer: C.....API 510, : Repairs to Stainless Steel Weld Overlay and Cladding
[[Link].4]
=========================================================
405. Any welding conducted on pressure vessel in operation must be done in
accordance with this document, and Inspector shall use as a minimum
“Suggested Hot Tap Checklist” contained in this document for hot tapping
performed on piping components. Which of the following documents
referenced in API 510 addresses hot tapping?
A) API 2201
B) ASME PCC-2, ASME PCC-2, Article 2.10
C) ASME section VIII Div. 1
D) A and B above
Answer: D.....API 510, : Welding and Hot Tapping [[Link]]
=========================================================
406. A pressure vessel weld repair work has to be carried out. Who is
responsible for having the WPS & PQR made?
A) Repair organization
B) Owner/operator
C) Inspector
D) engineer
Answer: A.....API 510, : Procedures, Qualifications, and Records [[Link].1]
=========================================================
407. To ensure compliance with API 510 code , Welding Procedure
Specification (WPS) must be qualified by _____
A) Repair organization
B) Owner/operator
C) Inspector
D) engineer
Answer: A.....API 510, : Procedures, Qualifications, and Records [[Link].1]
=========================================================
408. According to API-510, who is responsible for qualifying the welding
procedures that will be used during a repair of a pressure vessel?
A) Pressure vessel engineer
B) Pressure vessel inspector

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

C) Owner/operator of the vessel
D) Repair organization
Answer: D.....API 510, : Procedures, Qualifications, and Records [[Link].1]
=========================================================
409. Who is responsible for maintaining the records of welding procedures
and welder qualifications used during a repair?
A) Repair organization
B) Owner/operator
C) Inspector
D) Testing laboratory
Answer: D.....API 510, : Procedures, Qualifications, and Records [[Link].1]
=========================================================
410. Who is responsible for maintaining the records of welding procedures
and welder qualifications used during a repair?
A) Repair organization
B) Owner/operator
C) Inspector
D) Testing laboratory
Answer: A.....API 510, : Procedures, Qualifications, and Records [[Link].2]
=========================================================
411. Which of the following is responsible for maintaining the records of
qualified WPSs and PQRs used during repairs and alterations?
A) The owner/operator inspection organization
B) The engineer
C) The Inspector
D) The repair organization
Answer: D.....API 510, : Procedures, Qualifications, and Records [[Link].1 ]
=========================================================
412. The repair organization shall maintain records of its qualified welding
procedures and its welding performance qualifications. What is the
responsibility of the repair organization to the Inspector regarding these
records?
A) Records shall be available to the inspector at the start of welding
B) Records shall be available to the inspector prior to the start of welding
C) Records shall be available to the inspector any time after the start of
welding
D) Records shall be available to the inspector within 1 week after the start of
welding
Answer: B.....API 510, : Procedures, Qualifications, and Records [[Link].2 ]

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

413. Who is responsible to ensure that welders and welding procedures are
qualified in accordance with the applicable requirements of the construction
code, e.g. Section IX, for repair or alteration welding of a pressure vessel?
A) the inspector
B) the original manufacturer
C) the repair organization
D) the jurisdiction
Answer: A.....API 510, : Procedures, Qualifications, and Records [[Link].1 ]
=========================================================
414. Although the preheat temperature used in making welding repairs on a
pressure vessel shall be in accordance with the applicable code and qualified
welding procedure, can exceptions be made?
A) no exceptions can be made to the applicable code
B) yes, but must be approved by the engineer
C) yes, but must be approved by the inspector
D) no, the preheat temperatures in the ASME code are minimum requirement
Answer: B.....API 510, : Preheating [[Link] ]
=========================================================
415. Regarding preheating, preheat temperatures used in making welding
repairs shall be in accordance with the applicable code and qualified welding
procedure, and the inspector should assure that:
A) The minimum preheat temperature is measured and maintained
B) He approves any exceptions to preheating rules established in procedures
C) Welders know what the minimum preheat temperature requirements
D) Welder’s supervisor knows the required preheat values
Answer: A.....API 510, : Preheating [[Link] ]
=========================================================
416. What code should be followed for the PWHT requirements of pressure
vessel repairs or alterations?
A) the ASME code
B) the applicable construction code
C) an approved alternative PWHT procedure
D) all of the above
Answer: D.....API 510, : Post weld Heat Treatment (PWHT) [[Link].1 ]
=========================================================
417. local PWHT is substituted for 360-degree banding on local repairs in a
pressure vessel required that procedure be developed by ______
A) Pressure vessel engineer experienced in the appropriate engineering
specialties.
B) Metallurgist supervisor experienced in local PWHT.
C) PWHT contractor experienced in the appropriate engineering specialties
D) Metallurgist experienced in local PWHT.

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

Answer: A.....API 510, : Post weld Heat Treatment (PWHT) [[Link].2 ]
=========================================================
418. When PWHT is performed for environmental-assisted cracking
resistance, LOCAL PWHT MAY be substituted for 360-degree banding on local
repairs on all materials, provided that:
A) Local PWHT may NEVER be substituted for 360° banding to prevent
environmental cracking B)
B) Local PWHT temp is maintained for a distance not less than 2 x base metal
t (from weld toe)
C) A preheat of 300°F (150°C) or higher, as specified in the WPS, is
maintained during welding
D) A metallurgical review shall be conducted to assess whether the procedure
is acceptable
Answer: D.....API 510, : Post weld Heat Treatment (PWHT) [[Link].2 ]
=========================================================
419. What is the required size of the PWHT zone when local PWHT is
substituted for 360-degree banding on local repairs in a pressure vessel?
A) at least the base metal thickness measured from the toe of the weld
B) at least two times the base metal thickness measured from the toe of the
weld
C) at least two times the required thickness, not including corrosion
allowance, measured from the toe of the weld
D) 4 in. of the material or four times the material thickness (whichever is
greater) on each side of the groove
Answer: B.....API 510, : Post weld Heat Treatment (PWHT) [[Link].2 ]
=========================================================
420. Regarding PWHT, Local PWHT may be substituted for 360-degree
banding on local repairs on all materials, provided that the following
precaution is taken regarding preheating:
A) Preheat of 250ºF or higher, as specified in welding procedure, is
maintained during welding
B) Preheat of 300ºF or higher, as specified in welding procedure, is
maintained during welding
C) Preheat of 350ºF or higher, as specified in welding procedure, is
maintained during welding
D) Preheat of 400ºF or higher, as specified in welding procedure, is
maintained during welding
Answer: B.....API 510, : Post weld Heat Treatment (PWHT) [[Link].2 ]

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

421. Using local PWHT in lieu of 360° banding is permitted provided:
A) The application is reviewed and a procedure is developed by engineers
experienced in the appropriate engineering specialties
B) The reduction of thermal gradient during PWHT is less than 200°F per foot
C) A preheat of 350°F is maintained during the welding and the weld is
examined by MT
D) The application is reviewed and a procedure is developed by an API
authorized pressure vessel inspector
Answer: A.....API 510, : Post weld Heat Treatment (PWHT) [[Link].2 ]
=========================================================
422. Using local PWHT in lieu of 360° banding is permitted provided:
A) The application is reviewed and a procedure is developed by inspector
experienced in the appropriate engineering specialties
B) The reduction of thermal gradient during PWHT is less than 200°F per foot
C) A preheat of 300 °F (150 °C) or higher, as specified by specific welding
procedures, is maintained during welding.
D) The application is reviewed and a procedure is developed by an API
authorized pressure vessel inspector
Answer: C.....API 510, : Post weld Heat Treatment (PWHT) [[Link].2 ]
=========================================================
423. Prior to using preheat and controlled deposition welding in lieu of PWHT
during repairs or alterations of pressure vessels, what precaution is
necessary to assure the proposed alternative is suitable for the application?
A) a welder with more than 5 years experience is required
B) a welder with more than 10 years experience is required
C) a metallurgical review shall be performed by an inspector
D) a metallurgical review shall be performed by an engineer
Answer: D.....API 510, : Preheat or CDW Methods as Alternatives to PWHT
[[Link].3.1.2 ]
=========================================================
424. For repairs or alterations to a pressure vessel shell made from plate,
which of the following materials may be preheated in lieu of PWHT?
A) P-No. 1, Group 1, with notch toughness testing
B) P-No. 1, Group 4, without notch toughness testing
C) P-No. 3, Group 1
D) P-No. 5A
Answer: C.....API 510, : Preheating Method (Notch Toughness Testing Not
Required) [[Link].3.2 ]

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

425. For repairs or alterations to a pressure vessel, which of the following
welding processes may not be used when preheating is considered to be used
in lieu of PWHT?
A)SMAW
B)SAW
C)GMAW (short-circuiting)
D)GTAW
Answer: B.....API 510, : Preheating Method (Notch Toughness Testing Not
Required) [[Link].3.2 ]
426. When qualifying a welding procedure for repairing or making an
alteration to a pressure vessel shell by using controlled-deposition welding in
lieu of PWHT, what material shall be used for the test coupon?
A) the same ASME P-No. as the original material for the shell being repaired
B) the same ASME P-No. and Group No. as the original material for the shell
being repaired
C) a similar material specification type, grade, class and condition of heat
treatment as the original material specification for the shell being repaired
D) the same material specification type, grade, class and condition of heat
treatment as the original material specification for the shell being repaired
Answer: D.....API 510, : CDW Method (Notch Toughness Testing Required)
[[Link].3.3 ]
=========================================================
427. When qualifying a welding procedure for repairing or making an
alteration to a pressure vessel shell by using controlled-deposition welding in
lieu of PWHT, for welds made by SMAW, after completion of welding and
without allowing the weldment to cool below the minimum preheat
temperature, why shall the temperature of the weldment be raised to a
temperature of 500°F ± 50°F for a minimum period of two hours?
A) to complete the stress relieve the final bead
B) to assist out-gassing diffusion of any weld metal hydrogen picked up
during welding
C) to enhance hydrogen pick-up resistance
D) to ensure notch toughness properties are maintained in the weld and HAZ
Answer: B.....API 510, : CDW Method (Notch Toughness Testing Required)
[[Link].3.3 ]
=========================================================
428. When qualifying a welding procedure for repairing an ASME SA-516 Gr.
70 pressure vessel shell by using controlled-deposition welding in lieu of
PWHT, with a test coupon thickness T = 3.5 in. and the depth of test groove
welded t = 0.75 in., what is the thickness of base metal qualified?
A) 0.75 in.
B) 1.5 in.

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

C) 2 in. to unlimited
D) 3.5 in. to unlimited
Answer: C.....API 510, : CDW Method (Notch Toughness Testing Required)
[[Link].3.3 /Table 8.1]
=========================================================
429. A unit upgrade require adding two NPS 2 ( DN 50) nozzles to a Pressure
vessel. The vessel was originally fabricated from an SA-387 Gr. 22 (P-5A
material) of 0.699 inch ( 18 mm) thick plate. Which of the following
statements apply to the heat treatment of this work?
a) The material prevents substituting preheat for PWHT
b) Temper-bead installation may be used instead of PWHT
c) Vessel alterations prevent applying preheat as a PWHT alternative
d) Preheating to not less than 300°F is an alternative to PWHT
Answer: C.....API 510, : Preheat or CDW Methods as Alternatives to PWHT
[[Link].3.1.2 ]
=========================================================
430. The SMAW process is used to perform controlled deposition welded
repairs to a vessel that originally received PWHT. At what temperature must
the weld area be maintained?
a) 350°F ± 50°F for a minimum of 1 hour after completion
b) 350°F ± 50°F for a minimum of 2 hours after completion
c) 500°F ± 50°F for a minimum of 1 hour after completion
d) 500°F ± 50°F for a minimum of 2 hours after completion
Answer: D.....API 510, : CDW Method (Notch Toughness Testing Required)
[[Link].3.3 ]
=========================================================
431. Which of the following is an API-510 requirement for controlled
deposition welding?
A) The metallurgical review shall be performed by an engineer prior to its use
B) The weld area must be preheated to at least 425°F
C) The vessel for repair must be constructed of P-5 or P-7 material
D) The vessel was originally post weld heat treated due to the characteristics
of the fluids contained in it.
Answer: A.....API 510, : Preheat or CDW Methods as Alternatives to PWHT
[[Link].3.1.2 ]
=========================================================
432. What is the maximum Interpass temperature when using the preheat
alternative method for a weld repair on a vessel that originally had PWHT?
A) 300°F (150°C)
B) 400°F (205°C)
C) 500°F (260°C)
D) 600°F (315°C)

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

Answer: D.....API 510, : Preheating Method (Notch Toughness Testing Not
Required) [[Link].3.2 ]
=========================================================
433. What is the minimum preheat temperature when using the preheat
alternative method for a weld repair on a vessel that originally had PWHT?
A) 300°F (150°C)
B) 400°F (205°C)
C) 500°F (260°C)
D) 600°F (315°C)
Answer: A.....API 510, : Preheating Method (Notch Toughness Testing Not
Required) [[Link].3.2 ]
434. Which of these is correct regarding Preheating Method temps to be
maintained as specified in a WPS, when preheating is used as an alternative
in lieu of PWHT?
A) Preheat of 300°F (150°C) or higher, with interpass temps not exceeding
500°F(260°C)
B) Preheat of 300°F (150°C) or higher, with interpass temps not exceeding
600°F (315°C)
C) Preheat of 350°F (177°C) or higher, with interpass temps not exceeding
650°F (343°C)
D) Preheat of 350°F (177°C) or higher, with interpass temps not exceeding
650°F (343°C)
Answer: B.....API 510, : Preheating Method (Notch Toughness Testing Not
Required) [[Link].3.2 ]
=========================================================
435. Controlled deposition welding may be used in lieu of PWHT when notch
toughness is not required and:
A) When the original material is P-No. 1, P-No. 3, and P-No. 4 steels
B) Only when the MDMT of the material is -20°F
C) When the vessel has undergone PWHT
D) When electric resistance coils are not available
Answer: A.....API 510, : CDW Method (Notch Toughness Testing Required)
[[Link].3.3 ]
=========================================================
436. Controlled deposition welding may be used in lieu of PWHT when notch
toughness is not required and:
A) When the original material is P-No. 4 steels
B) Only when the MDMT of the material is -20°F
C) When the vessel has undergone PWHT
D) When electric resistance coils are not available
Answer: A.....API 510, : CDW Method (Notch Toughness Testing Required)
[[Link].3.3 ]

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

437. Which method can be used in leu of PWHT for material P-No. 1, P-No. 3,
and P-No. 4 steels?
A) Controlled-deposition Welding (CDW) Method
B) Preheat Method
C) Preheat or Controlled-deposition Welding (CDW) Methods
D) None of the above
Answer: A.....API 510, : CDW Method (Notch Toughness Testing Required)
[[Link].3.3 ]
=========================================================
438. During Controlled deposition welding (CDW), The preheat temperature
shall be checked to assure that ___________on each side of the weld joint will
be maintained at the minimum temperature during welding.
A) 4 in. (100 mm) of the material or four times the material thickness
whichever is greater.
B) 4 in. (100 mm) of the material or four times the material thickness
whichever is Lesser.
C) 2 in. (50 mm) of the material or two times the material thickness
whichever is Lesser.
D) 2 in. (50 mm) of the material or two times the material thickness
whichever is greater.
Answer: A.....API 510, : CDW Method (Notch Toughness Testing Required)
[[Link].3.3 ]
=========================================================
439. Which of these electrodes may eliminate the need for Hydrogen Bake-out
post-weld treatments (SMAW process), if controlled deposition welding is
done in lieu of PWHT?
A) E7018-H8
B) E7018-H6
C) E7018-H4
D) E7018-H1
Answer: C.....API 510, : CDW Method (Notch Toughness Testing Required)
[[Link].3.3 ]
=========================================================
440. During repairs , material required for_____________
A) Only alloy material
B) Any material with MTRS
C) all new material
D) All new material expect material have a carbon content of more than
0.35 %.
Answer: D.....API 510, : CDW Method (Notch Toughness Testing Required)
[[Link].3.3 ]

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

441. Prior to removing a crack in a pressure vessel by repair welding, what
inspection technique is usually performed to examine the area prepared for
welding to determine that no defects exist?
A) VT
B) MT
C) PT
D) either MT or PT
Answer: D.....API 510, : NDE of Welds [[Link] ]
=========================================================
442. Prior to welding, Which NDT technique usually to be used on the area
prepared for welding to determine that no defects exist?
A) UT technique .
B) RT technique
C) either the RT or PT technique
D) either the MT or PT technique
Answer: D.....API 510, : NDE of Welds [[Link] ]
=========================================================
443. When RT is not possible or practical, alternative NDE techniques may be
used provided they are approved by ______
A) Engineer experienced in NDE procedure.
B) the engineer or inspector
C) Not permitted
D) the engineer and inspector
Answer: D.....API 510, : NDE of Welds [[Link] ]
=========================================================
444. Acceptance criteria for welded repairs should include NDE techniques
that are in accordance with which of the following?
A) AWS
B) ASTM
C) ASME Code
D) ASME Code or another applicable vessel rating code
Answer: D.....API 510, : NDE of Welds [[Link] ]
=========================================================
445. How should inspection techniques be selected to detect critical flaws in
vessels constructed of materials that may be subject to brittle fracture?
A) as determined by a fitness-for-service assessment
B) as determined by the inspector
C) as determined by the engineer
D) as determined by the inspector in consultation with the engineer
Answer: A.....API 510, : Weld Inspection for Vessels Subject to Brittle Fracture
[8.1.9]

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

446. Rerating nameplate is Rerating a pressure vessel by :
A) Thickness measurements are taken
B) ASME credited repair organization
C) Acceptance of welding procedures and welder qualifications
D) changing its design temperature, minimum metal design temperature, or
its MAWP
Answer: D.....API 510, : Rerating [8.2.1]
=========================================================
447. Calculations by the original manufacturer or an engineer shall be
completed before:
A) Thickness measurements are taken
B) Re-rating the vessel
C) Acceptance of welding procedures and welder qualifications
D) Repairing a portion of the vessel due to corrosion
Answer: B.....API 510, : Rerating [8.2.1(a)]
=========================================================
448. Re-rating calculations shall be performed by the manufacturer or which
of the following?
A) Owner/user engineer experienced in pressure vessel design
B) Registered professional engineer only
C) API-510 inspector
D) ASME credited repair organization
Answer: A.....API 510, : Rerating [8.2.1(a)]
=========================================================
449. A pressure vessel constructed of SA-285 Grade C material to the 1965
edition of the ASME Code, section VIII, Division 1 has been in storage for
several years. It is proposed to increase the design by temperature from 500
ºF to 650 ºFusing the current edition of ASME Code, section VIII, Division 1 .
the inspector should _____
A) Reject the proposal ,as the vessel cannot be rerated to the current code
specification.
B) Accept the proposal if the vessel wall thickness is adequate for the new
design condition.
C) Reject the proposal since the allowable stress for SA-285 Grade C changes
below 650 ºF in the newer code..
D) Accept the proposal since the vessel materials are list in the current edition
of ASME code.
Answer: A.....API 510, : Rerating [8.2.1(b) /Figure 8.1]

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

450. A vessel built to the 1977 edition of the ASME section VIII , Division 1
Code is to be rerated , but the vessel shell material is not listed in the current
edition of the ASME Code , Section II . May the vessel be rerated using the
current ASME Code allowable stress ?
A) No, the vessel cannot be rerated to the current ASME code allowable stress
B) Yes , provided the vessel material can be certified using section VIII ,
Division 1, paragraph UG-10 method.
C) No , unless material coupons taken from the vessel was establish the
material properties.
D) yes, provided the vessel material can be certified using methods specified
in API RP 579, Section 6.
Answer: B.....API 510, : Rerating [8.2.1(b) /Figure 8.1]
=========================================================
451. A vessel nameplate indicates the MAWP to be 250psi at 650°F, the current
operating temperature is 600°F and the owner intends to increase the
operating temperature by 100°F. Which of the following is the first step in
increasing the operating temperature?
a) Perform an internal inspection of the pressure vessel
b) Re-calculate a new corrosion rate for the pressure vessel
c) Re-calculate the minimum required thickness of the pressure vessel
d) Ensure the pressure relief devices are suitable for the new temperature
Answer: C.....API 510, : Rerating [8.2.1(c)]
=========================================================
452. The rate of metal loss caused by corrosion or erosion can typically be
determined by:
A) Referring to corrosion tables
B) Evaluating the operating conditions of the component
C) Comparing consecutive thickness measurements
D) Taking a thickness measurement of the component
Answer: C.....API 510, : Rerating [8.2.1(c)]
=========================================================
453. Pressure tests must be performed on pressure vessels that have been in
service when:
A) The vessels is opened for internal inspection
B) The inspector deems it necessary
C) Repairs or alterations have been performed
D) The vessel is rerated to a higher pressure
Answer: D.....API 510, : Rerating [8.2.1 (d)]
=========================================================
454. When is re-rating of a pressure vessel considered complete?
a) After the inspector witnesses the attachment of an additional nameplate
b) After calculations are reviewed and approved by the inspector

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

c) After the engineer witnesses the attachment of the re-rating nameplate
d) After an additional nameplate is attached to the vessel by welding, and the
re-rating record is approved by vessel owner/user
Answer: A.....API 510, : Rerating [8.2.2]

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

 4. ASME V 2015 Edition
Article 1 -General Requirements
1. What is the intent of the NDE methods specified in ASME V?
a) intended to detect surface and internal defects in materials, welds,
fabricated parts, and components
b) intended to detect surface and internal imperfections in materials, welds,
fabricated parts, and components
c) intended to examine all flaws and defects in materials, welds, fabricated
parts, and components
d) intended to examine surface and internal bodies in materials, welds,
fabricated parts, and components
Answer: A. ASME V, Procedure [T-110]
=========================================================
2. When NDE requirements of ASME Section V are required, who shall be
responsible to establish Nondestructive examination procedures?
a) manufacturer
b) fabricator
c) installer
d) all of the above
Answer: D. ASME V, Procedure [T-150]
=========================================================
3. When required by the referencing ASME Code Section, how shall all
Nondestructive examinations performed under ASME Section V be done?
a) to a verbal procedure
b) to a demonstrated procedure
c) to a written procedure
d) to a qualified procedure
Answer: C. ASME V, Procedure [T-150]
=========================================================
4. Who shall assure that all NDE equipment calibrations required by ASME V
are
performed?
a) inspector
b) manufacturer, fabricator, or installer
c) owner user
d) owner user or designee
Answer: B. ASME V, Calibration [T-160]
=========================================================
5. What does the term "inspection" apply to in ASME V?
a) the functions performed by the Authorized Inspector
b) the functions performed by the Authorized Examiner
c) the functions performed by the NDE Inspector
Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam
d) the functions performed by the NDE Examiner
Answer: A. ASME V, Examinations and inspections [T-170]
=========================================================
6. What does the term "examination" apply to in ASME V?
a) those quality control functions performed by personnel employed by the
Manufacturer
b) those quality control functions performed by personnel employed by the
owner/user
c) those examination functions performed by personnel employed by the
Manufacturer
d) those examination functions performed by personnel employed by the
owner/user
Answer: A. ASME V, Examinations and inspections [T-170]
=========================================================
7. ASNT recommended Practice SNT-TC-1A is a:
A) Manual covering nondestructive examination (NDE) safety procedures
B) Procedure for the visual examination of piping systems
C) Document covering NDE personnel qualifications
D) Document covering NDE procedures
Answer: C. ASME V, General [T-120]
=========================================================
8. Which of the following contain minimum details of Examination records for
RT procedure?
A) Article 1, T-120
B) Article 1, T-150
C) Article 1, T-190
D) Article 2, T-230
Answer: C. ASME V, General [T-190] Article 2- Radiographic Examination
=========================================================
9. For a material thickness of 2 inches (50.8 mm), the geometric unsharpness
of a radiograph, when required by referencing code, shall not exceed?
a) 0.010 inch (0.25 mm)
b) 0.020 inch (0.51 mm)
c) 0.030 inch (0.76 mm)
d) 0.040 inch (1.02 mm)
Answer: C. ASME V, Geometric Unsharpness Limitations. [T-274.2]
=========================================================
10. On what basis are image quality indicators (IQI) selected?
A) The strength of the radiation source
B) The film type used by the radiographer
C) The alloy content of the material being radiographed
D) The thickness of base material plus weld reinforcement

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

Answer: D. ASME V, IQI Size [T-276.2 (a)&(b)]
=========================================================
11. When inaccessibility prevents placing IQIs manually on the source side of a
weld being radiographed, what identification is placed on a radiograph to
indicate that film side IQIs were used?
A) Letters IQI
B) Letter B
C) Letter F
D) Letters FSP
Answer: C. ASME V, Placement of IQIs [T-277.1 (b)]
=========================================================
12. During radiographic examination of a weld, a wire-type IQI shall be
placed:
A) Adjacent to the weld so that the length of the wire is perpendicular to the
weld
B) Adjacent to the weld so that the length of the wire is parallel to the weld
C) On the weld so that the length of the wire is perpendicular to the weld
D) On the weld so that the length of the wire is parallel to the weld
Answer: C. ASME V, Placement of IQIs [T-277.1 (d)]
=========================================================
13. {When reviewing a group of radiographs, all of the following information
must be available EXCEPT:} / {Which of the following information is not
required to be documented for a radiograph?}:
A) Minimum source-to-film distance
B) Geometric unsharpness
C) Material type
D) Exposure technique
Answer: C. ASME V, Radiographic Technique Documentation Details [T-291]
=========================================================
14. The density of step wedge comparison film and densitometer calibrations
shall be verified by using calibrated step wedge film traceable to:
A) An ASME V Standard certified film
B) An ASME calibrated step wedge
C) An ASNT certified procedure
D) National standard (step tablet)
Answer: D. ASME V, Densitometers [T-262.1(a)]
=========================================================
15. What film side hole IQI designation would be required, using Gamma-ray
radiography, for examination of a weld repair in piping that is 0.875” thick?
a) 10
b) 20
c) 30

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

d) 35
Answer: B. ASME V, IQI Selection [T-276.2 /Table T-276]
=========================================================
16. What is the maximum density, in the area of interest, for gamma ray
source radiography?
a) 1.3
b) 1.8
c) 2.0
d) 4.0
Answer: B. ASME V, Radiographic density [T-282]
=========================================================
17. What is the cause for rejection of the “B” image on a film due to excessive
backscatter?
a) Any image
b) No image
c) A light image
d) A dark image
Answer: C. ASME V, Excessive Backscatter [T-284]
=========================================================
18. Light letter B on the radiography film indicates:
a) Sufficient back scatter and film is acceptable
b) Insufficient backscatter and film is rejected
c) Insufficient backscatter and film is acceptable
d) Sufficient backscatter and film is rejected
Answer: d. ASME V, Excessive Backscatter [T-284]
=========================================================
19. Image quality indicators are always selected on the base of
a) Thickness of the material being welded.
b) Quality specified for the weld.
c) Film speed selected for the job.
d) Size of the penetrameter hole.
Answer: A. ASME V, IQI Size [T-276.2 (a)&(b)]]
=========================================================
20. material 1.25 in, what is the hole type IQI shall be used if the weld is
accessible from both sides?
a) 10
b) 20
c) 30
d) 35
Answer: C. ASME V, IQI Selection [T-276.2 /Table T-276]

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

21. Location markers which are to appear as radiographic images on the film
shall always be placed:
A) On the exposure holder/cassette
B) On the radiographic film
C) Between the film and the part being radiographed
D) On the part being radiographed
Answer: D. ASME V, Location Markers [T-275]
=========================================================
22. Component where the source is placed perpendicular to the center of a
length of weld for a single exposure when using more than three film holders
______
a) at least three IQIs are required.
b) at least two IQIs are required.
c) at least one is required.
d) at least four are required.
Answer: A. ASME V, Number of IQIs [T-277.2 (b)(7)]
=========================================================
23. A single wall exposure technique was used to make a radiograph using a
Cobalt-60 source. The minimum permitted density in the area of interest per
ASME V code is:
A) 1.3
B) 1.8
C) 2.0
D) None of these are correct?
Answer: C. ASME V, Radiographic density [T-282]
=========================================================
24. The densitometer is acceptable if the density readings_______________
A) vary by more than ±0.05 density units
B) do not vary by less than ±0.05 density units
C) do not vary by more than ±0.05 density units
D) None of these are correct
Answer: C. ASME V, Densitometers. [T-262.19(d)]
=========================================================
25. What film side hole IQI designation would be required, using Gamma-ray
radiography, for examination of a weld repair in piping that is 0.5” thick?
a) 10
b) 17
c) 20
d) 30
Answer: B. ASME V, IQI Selection [T-276.2 /Table T-276]

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

26. Densitometers shall be calibrated ________________
a) prior to first use
b) prior to testing the equipment on the procedure to be used
c) at least once a year
d) at least every 90 days
Answer: D. ASME V, IQI Densitometers [T-262.1]
=========================================================
27. For material thicknesses less than 2”, what is the maximum geometric
unsharpness permitted when required by the referencing code?
a) 0.010 inch (0.25 mm)
b) 0.020 inch (0.51 mm)
c) 0.030 inch (0.76 mm)
d) 0.040 inch (1.02 mm)
Answer: B. ASME V, Geometric Unsharpness Limitations. [T-274.2]
Article 6 -Liquid Penetrant Examination
=========================================================
28. The liquid penetrant examination method is an effective means for
detecting
________.
a) discontinuities which are open to the surface or subsurface
b) discontinuities which are open to the surface or slightly subsurface
c) discontinuities which are open to the surface of all materials
d) discontinuities which are open to the surface of nonporous metals
Answer: D. ASME V, General [T-620]
=========================================================
29. As a standard technique, the temperature of the penetrant and the surface
of the part to be processed shall not be below _____________
A. 125°F
B. 40°F
C. 32°F
D. 81°C
Answer: B. ASME V, Techniques for Nonstandard Temperatures [T-653]
=========================================================
30. As a standard technique, the temperature of the penetrant and the surface
of the part
to be processed shall not be above ________________
A. 125°F
B. 50°F
C. 32°F
D. 81°C
Answer: A. ASME V, Techniques for Nonstandard Temperatures [T-653]

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

31. Excess water washable penetrant shall be removed with a water spray. The
water pressure shall not exceed __________________
A. 110 PSI
B. 90 PSI
C. 50 PSI
D. 20 PSI
Answer: C. ASME V, Water Washable Penetrants [T -673.1]
=========================================================
32. Flushing the surface with solvent, following the application of the
penetrant and prior to developing is _________________
A. The average PT technique
B. Allowed if sufficient solvent is available
C. Not mentioned in ASME Section V
D. prohibited
Answer: D. ASME V, Solvent Removable Penetrants [T-673.3]
=========================================================
33. During PT test, final interpretation shall be made within what time range?
A. 7 to 60 min
B. 10 to 60 min
C. 60 to 120 min
D. any time after 24 hours
Answer: B. ASME V, Final Interpretation [T-676.1]
=========================================================
34. With post-emulsifying penetrants the emulsification time is ____________
A. Based on water pressure
B. Not as important as the dwell time
C. To be calculated based on surface temperature
D. To be determined experimentally
Answer: B. ASME V, Post-Emulsification Penetrants. [T-673.2 (a)]
=========================================================
35. When performing liquid penetrant examination of stainless-steel weld
joints, which of the following is correct when verifying acceptable penetrant
materials?
A) Verify certifications of penetrant and developer materials for total
halogens (chlorine / fluorine) content
B) Verify certifications of penetrant and developer materials for lead and
contaminants
C) Check (verify) the material containers for proper identification and batch
numbers
D) Check (verify) the material containers for an indication of the VOC content
Answer: A. ASME V, Control of contaminants for L.P.E [APPENDIX II]
Article 7 -Magnetic Particle Examination

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

36. Magnetic Particle examination methods can detect which of these
discontinuities?
A) Both shallow sub-surface cracks and surface cracks
B) Both deep sub-surface cracks and surface cracks
C) Shallow sub-surface cracks
D) Deep sub-surface cracks
Answer: A. ASME V, General [T-720]
=========================================================
37. The maximum surface temperature for dry magnetic particle testing of
welds is:
A) Set by examination medium manufacturer
B) Limited by magnetic particle permeability
C) 250°F
D) 600°F
Answer: A. ASME V, Temperature Limitations [T-731 (c)]
=========================================================
38. What is the acceptable range of magnetizing current (amps) required for
prod spacing of 6 inches on an as welded NPS 24 Schedule 40 ASTM A-106 Gr.
B pipe weld?
A) 600 to 750 amps
B) 720 to 880 amps
C) 800 to 1000 amps
D) None of these are correct
Answer: D. ASME V, Prod Technique [T-752.2]
1. Determine the thickness of pipe from the API 574, table 1 @ NPS 24 SCH.40,
t= 0.688
2. Determine the current: -
For sections less than 3⁄4 in. (19 mm) thick, the current shall be 90 amp/ to
110 amp/in. of
prod spacing.
Current =6 x (90 amp. /in to 110 amp/in.) = 540-660 amps
=========================================================
39. Magnetic Particle Examination (MT) is most effective when the:
a) current flow is 45º to the major axis of discontinuities
b) magnetic flux is parallel to the major axis of discontinuities
c) magnetic flux is 90º to the major axis of discontinuities
d) current flow is normal to the major axis of discontinuities
Answer: C. ASME V, General [T-720]

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

40. When a direct-current magnetic yoke is checked for lifting power. It must
be capable
of lifting at least many pounds at the maximum pole spacing:
a) 10 pounds
b) 30 pounds
c) 40 pounds
d) 50 pounds
Answer: C. ASME V, Lifting Power of Yokes [T-762]
=========================================================
41. When AC electromagnetic yoke is checked for lifting power. It must be
capable of lifting at least many pounds at the maximum pole spacing:
A. 100 lbs.
B. 40 lbs.
C. 10 lbs.
D. 5 lbs.
Answer: C. ASME V, Lifting Power of Yokes [T-762]
=========================================================
42. The acceptable frequency to check the magnetizing power of an
electromagnetic yokes is
A) Every year
B) Before and after use
C) Every two years
D) Every six months
Answer: A. ASME V, Lifting Power of Yokes [T-762]
=========================================================
43. {During the fluorescent MT test, the black light intensity shall be
measured with a black light meter_} / {How often should the black light
intensity be check for the fluorescent particle technique of Magnetic Particle
examination?}
A) Every 8 hours and whenever the workstation is changed
B) Every 4 hours and whenever the workstation is changed
C) Whenever the light’s power source is interrupted and at the end of each
days’ examinations
D) prior to use, whenever the light’s power source is interrupted or changed,
and at the completion of the examination or series of examinations.
Answer: D. ASME V, Fluorescent Magnetic Particles with Black Light [T-777.2]
=========================================================
44. When it is necessary to verify the adequacy or direction of the
magnetizing field, ________ shall be used.
A. A pie-shaped magnetic particle field indicator
B. A polarized lens type indicator
C. A florescent light with appropriate safety shield

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

D. Iron powder in a non-aqueous base
Answer: A. ASME V, Magnetic Field Adequacy [T-764.2 (a)]
=========================================================
45. What is the maximum allowable prod spacing using an AC prod technique?
A. t/2
B. 8 inches
C. 10 inches
D. No spacing required
Answer: B. ASME V, Prod Spacing. [T-752.3]
=========================================================
46. magnetizing equipment with an ammeter used for magnetic particle
examinations shall be calibrated
a) prior to first use
b) prior to testing the equipment on the procedure to be used
c) at least once a year
d) at least once a year, or whenever the equipment has been subjected to
major electric repair, periodic overhaul, or damage
Answer: D. ASME V, Frequency of Calibration [T-761.1 (a)]
=========================================================
47. MT Examination part surface temperature outside of the temperature
range recommended by ________
a) the manufacturer of the particles or as previously qualified.
b) owner /user.
c) authorized Inspector.
d) None of the above
Answer: A. ASME V, Temperature Limitations [T-731 (c)]
=========================================================
48. The unit’s meter reading shall___________________, relative to the actual
current value as shown by the test meter.
a) not deviate by more than ± 5 % of full scale.
b) not deviate by more than ±10 % of full scale.
c) not deviate by less than ±10% of full scale.
d) not deviate by more than ±15% of full scale.
e) None of the above
Answer: B. ASME V, Frequency of Calibration [T-761.1 (c)]
=========================================================
49. Which of the following the best surface preparation Prior to Wet
fluorescent magnetic particle testing (WFMT)?
A) the surface to be examined and all adjacent areas within at least 1 in. (25
mm)
B) the surface to be examined and all adjacent areas within at least 2 in. (25
mm).

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

C) the surface to be examined and all adjacent areas within at least 3 in. (25
mm).
D) the surface to be examined and all adjacent areas within at least 1 in. (25
mm) shall be dry and free of all dirt, grease, lint, scale, welding flux and
spatter, oil that could interfere with the examination.
Answer: D. ASME V, Preparation. [T-741.1 (b)] SE-797 Standard practice for
measuring thickness by Manual ultrasonic pulse-echo contact Method
=========================================================
50. The apparent thickness reading obtained from steel walls having elevated
temperatures is high (too thick) by a factor of about__________
A) 1% per 55°C (100°F).
B) 2% per 93°C (200°F).
C) 3% per 20°C (68°F),
D) 8% per 460°C (860°F)
Answer: A... ASME V, [SE-797 ,9.5]
=========================================================
51. if the instrument was standardized on a piece of similar material at 20°C
(68°F), and if the reading was obtained with a surface temperature of 460°C
(860°F), the apparent reading should be_______
A) reduced by 1%.
B) reduced by 4%.
C) Increase by 8%.
D) reduced by 8%.
Answer: D... ASME V, [SE-797 ,9.5]
=========================================================
52. {ultrasonic equipment for UT shall be calibrated_____}/ {Calibrations
shall include the complete ultrasonic system and shall be
performed_____________}
A) prior to use of the system in the thickness range under examination
B) after to use of the system in the thickness range under examination
C) prior to use, whenever the power source is interrupted or changed, and at
the completion of the examination or series of examinations
D) at least once every 1 hours
E) at least once every 8 hours
Answer: C. Body knowledge
=========================================================
53. In ultrasonic examination, the maximum scanning speed shall be:
a) Not more than six inches per minute
b) Stated in the procedure
c) Determined by the technician based on environmental conditions
d) Not more than six inches per second
Answer: B... ASME V, [SE-797 ,9.3]

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

 5. ASME IX 2015
Part QG- General Requirements
1. What does the welding procedure qualification establish?
a) the properties of the weldment, not the skill of the welder or welding
operator
b) the properties of the weld metal, not the skill of the welder or welding
operator
c) the skill of the welder or welding operator, not the properties of the
weldment
d) the skill of the welder or welding operator, not the properties of the weld
metal
Answer: A. ASME IX, Procedure Qualification Record [QG-102]
=========================================================
2. Welder’s Performance Qualification Record documents:
a) to determine the welder's ability to deposit sound weld metal
b) to determine the welder's ability to follow the WPS
c) to determine the welder's ability to follow the inspector's instructions
d) to ensure the PQR qualifies the WPS
Answer: A. ASME IX, Performance Qualification [QG-103/QW-102] /API 577
[Para. 8.1]
=========================================================
3. the purpose of the welding procedure specification (WPS)and the procedure
qualification record (PQR) is to:
A) Document the welding of the test coupon and to provide the direction to the
welder
B) Establish the skill of a welder and a welder’s ability to deposit sound weld
metal
C) Determine the extent of weldment RT required
D) Ensure the weld is free of mechanical defects
Answer: A. ASME IX, WPS & PQR [QG-101 & QG-102] API 577 [6.1]
=========================================================
4. A welding procedure specification and its supporting procedure
qualification record are used to determine which of the following?
A) The welder’s ability to deposit sound weld metal
B) The welder’s mechanical ability when operating welding equipment
C) The welder’s ability to produce welds that are radiographed free of defects
D) That the weldment will have the required properties for the intended
application
Answer: D. ASME IX, WPS & PQR [QG-101 & QG-102] API 577 [6.1]

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

5. A welding procedure specification (WPS) is selected for a repair on cold
service piping. Impact testing of the weldment is required. Which of the
following is /are required on the WPS?
A) A record of the welding data used to weld a test coupon.
B) A description of the required repair.
C) All essential, nonessential, and supplementary variables if notch toughness
is required.
D) The results of mechanical testing
Answer: C. ASME IX, WPS [QG-101] /API 577 [6.2]
=========================================================
6. What is the purpose of the WPS?
a) provides direction to the welder while making production welds to ASME
code requirements
b) provides direction to the welder while making production welds to API code
requirements
c) provides verbal rules for making production welds to ASME code
requirements
d) provides rules for qualifying the welder
Answer: A. ASME IX, WPS [QG-101] /API 577 [6.1]
=========================================================
7. The PQR shall record all of the following items except:
A) Manufacturer’s certification of accuracy in the qualification of a WPS
B) The nonessential variables used to weld a test coupon
C) The essential variables used to weld a test coupon
D) Coupon test results
Answer: B. ASME IX, PQR [QG-102] /API 577 [6.3]
=========================================================
8. What is a PQR?
a) it is a record of the welding data and variables used to weld a test coupon
and the test results used to qualify the welder
b) it is a record of the welding data and variables used to weld a test coupon
and the test results used to qualify the welding procedure
c) it is a record of the welding data used to test a weld coupon
d) provides rules for making production welds to ASME code requirements
Answer: B. ASME IX, PQR [QG-102] / API 577[6.1/6.3]
=========================================================
9. A change in a non-essential variable in a WPS will require:
A) A new procedure PQR
B) That the WPS be re-qualified
C) The supporting PQR be updated
D) That the WPS be updated
Answer: D. ASME IX, Nonessential Variables [QG-105.4/ QW-251.3]

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

10. What is the purpose of the performance qualification test for the welding
operator?
a) to determine the welder's ability to select the appropriate weld metal
b) to determine the welder's ability to select the appropriate AWS Class filler
metal
c) to determine the welder's ability to deposit sound weld metal
d) to determine the welding operator's mechanical ability to operate the
welding equipment
=========================================================
11. New Welding Procedure Specifications must meet the _________ Edition
and Addenda of Section IX.
A. 1962
B. current
C. 1986
D. 1995
Answer: B. ASME IX, Qualifications Made to Previous Editions [QG-108]
=========================================================
12. Is a welding procedure qualified under the 1965 ASME Code Section IX still
applicable?
A. Yes
B. No, must be re-qualified
C. Is only applicable for 1965 pressure vessels
D. Cannot be used for new construction – repairs only
Answer: A. ASME IX, Qualifications Made to Previous Editions [QG-108]
=========================================================
13. When a WPS is to be prepared by the manufacturer or contractor, it must
address, as
a minimum, the specific variables, --------
A. nonessential variables.
B. Essential variables
C. supplementary essential variables (when notch toughness is required)
D. All of the above
Answer: D. ASME IX, Welding Procedure Specification [QG-101] /API 577) [6.2]
=========================================================
14. As a minimum, the PQR shall document the ---------applied during
production of the test joint, and the results of the required tests.
A. Nonessential procedure qualification test variables.
B. Essential procedure qualification test variables
C. supplementary essential variables
D. B as a minimum and C (when notch toughness is required)
E. All of the above
Answer: D. ASME IX, Procedure Qualification Record [QG-102]/ API 577 [6.3]

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

15. What is an essential variable?
A) those in which a change is considered to affect the mechanical properties of
the weldment, and shall require requalification of the WPS
B) those in which a change is considered not to affect the mechanical
properties of the weldment, and does not require requalification of the
WPS
C)those in which a change is considered to affect the low temperature
mechanical properties of the weldment, and shall require requalification of
the WPS
D) those in which a change is considered to affect the impact properties of the
weldment, and shall require requalification of the WPS
Answer: A. ASME IX, Essential Variables (Procedure) [QG-105.1 /QW-251.2]
=========================================================
16. What is Non-essential variable?
A) required for metals for which other Codes specify notch-toughness tests
and are in addition to the essential variables for each welding process
B) those in which a change is considered to affect the mechanical properties of
the weldment, and shall require requalification of the WPS
C) those in which a change, as described in the specific variables, may be
made in the WPS without requalification
D) those in which a change is considered to affect the mechanical properties
of the weldment, and shall not require requalification of the WPS
Answer: C. ASME IX, Nonessential Variables [QG-105.4/ QW-251.3]
Article I -Welding General Requirements
=========================================================
17. Each ____________shall conduct the tests required by Section IX to qualify
the WPS’s used during the construction, alteration, or repair.
A. Welder or welding operator
B. Manufacturer or contractor
C. Inspector
D. All of the above
Answer: B. ASME IX, Responsibility [QW-103]
=========================================================
18. What is the horizontal test position for groove welded plate or pipe?
a) 1G
b) 2G
c) 2F
d) 2FG
e) 2FR
Answer: B. ASME IX, Test Positions [QW-121.2 & QW-122.2]

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

19. What is the horizontal test position for fillet welded pipe with rotation?
a) 1G
b) 2G
c) 2F
d) 2FG
e) 2FR
Answer: E. ASME IX, Test Positions [QW-132.2(b)]
=========================================================
20. Which of the following test positions designates overhead welding without
rotation?
a) 1G
b) 6G
c) 3F
d) 4F
e) 4FR
Answer: D. ASME IX, Test Positions [QW-132.2]
=========================================================
21. Which of the following test positions requires the coupon to be held at 45°
angle?
a) 1G
b) 5G
c) 1F
d) 2F
e) 2FR
Answer: C. ASME IX, Test Positions [QW-132.1]
=========================================================
22. What are the groove weld plate positions?
a) flat 1G, horizontal 2G, vertical 3G, overhead 4G
b) flat 1G, horizontal 2G, multiple 3G, overhead 4G
c) flat 1F, horizontal 2F and 2FR, overhead 4F, multiple 5F
d) flat 1G, horizontal 2G, overhead 4G, multiple 6G
Answer: A. ASME IX, Test Positions [QW-121]
=========================================================
23. What are the groove weld pipe positions?
a) flat 1G, horizontal 2G, vertical 3G, overhead 4G
b) flat 1G, horizontal 2G, multiple 3G, overhead 4G
c)flat 1F, horizontal 2F and 2FR, overhead 4F, multiple 5F
d) flat 1G, horizontal 2G, vertical 5G, multiple 6G
Answer: D. ASME IX, Test Positions [QW-122]

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

24. Which of the following tests is performed to determine the ultimate
strength of groove-weld joints?
a) guided-bend test
b) hammer test
c) torque test
d) tension test
e) impact test
Answer: D. ASME IX, Mechanical Tests [QW-141.1]
=========================================================
25. ASME IX Mechanical Tests (Tension Tests) are used to determine the:
A) Degree of soundness and ductility of groove-weld joints
B) Ultimate strength of groove-weld joints
C) Notch toughness of the weld
D) Stress values used in Calculations
Answer: B. ASME IX, Mechanical Tests [QW-141.1]
=========================================================
26. ASME IX Mechanical Tests (Guided-Bend Tests) are used to determine the:
A) Degree of soundness and ductility of groove-weld joints
B) Ultimate strength of groove-weld joints
C) Notch toughness of the weld
D) Stress values used in Calculations
Answer: A. ASME IX, Mechanical Tests [QW-141.2]
=========================================================
27. ASME IX Mechanical Tests (Charpy Impact Tests) are used to determine
the:
A) Degree of soundness and ductility of groove-weld joints
B) Ultimate strength of groove-weld joints
C) Notch toughness of the weld
D) Stress values used in Calculations
Answer: C. ASME IX, Mechanical Tests [QW-141.4]
=========================================================
28. What may be substituted for mechanical testing for groove-weld
performance qualification to prove the ability of welder & welding operators
to make sound welds?
a) ultrasonic examination
b) radiographic examination
c) bend testing
d) tensile testing
e) A or B
Answer: E. ASME IX, Examination for Welders & Welding Operators [QW-142
& QW-143]

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

29. Charpy V-notch tests are performed to determine a weldment’s
a) Tensile strength
b) Ductility
c) Notch toughness
d) All of above
Answer: C. ASME IX, Mechanical Tests [QW-142 & QW-143]
=========================================================
30. When conducting a tension test for weld procedure qualification, the
specimen breaks in the base metal outside the weld and weld interface, the
test is acceptable provided:
a) The strength is not more than five percent below the minimum specified
tensile strength of the base metal
b) The strength is not more than ten percent below the minimum specified
tensile strength of the base metal
c) The specimen is not acceptable because it must not fail
d) The specimen is not acceptable because the weld must fail before the base
metal
Answer: A. ASME IX, Acceptance Criteria — Tension Tests [QW-153]
=========================================================
31. When qualifying a welding procedure, the tensile strength shall be
computed by dividing the ultimate total load by the least cross-sectional area
of the specimen as calculated from which measurements?
a) actual measurements made before the load is applied
b) actual measurements made during the load is application
c) actual measurements made after the load is applied
d) actual measurements made before and after the load is applied
Answer: A. ASME IX, Tension Test Procedure [QW-152]
=========================================================
32. What tensile strength requirement is necessary in order to pass the
tension test for WPS qualification?
a) the minimum specified tensile strength of the base metal
b) the maximum specified tensile strength of the weaker of the two, if base
metals of different minimum tensile strengths are used
c) the maximum specified tensile strength of the weld metal when the
applicable Section provides for the use of weld metal having lower room
temperature strength than the base metal
d) if the specimen breaks in the base metal outside of the weld or weld
interface, the test shall be accepted as meeting the requirements, provided
the strength is not more than 2% below the minimum specified tensile
strength of the base metal
Answer: A. ASME IX, Acceptance Criteria — Tension Tests [QW-153]

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

33. As part of a welding procedure qualification, a tensile test is performed on
SA-335 grade P1 pipe. The test specimen was 0.750 in. wide and 0.175 in.
thick. The specimen broke in the base metal outside of the weld and weld
interface. What is the minimum acceptable tensile strength for this WPS
qualification?
a) 50 ksi
b) 52 ksi
c) 52.25 ksi
d) 55 ksi
e) 57 ksi
Answer: C. ASME IX, Acceptance Criteria — Tension Tests [QW-153]
From QW/QB-424: Minimum specified tensile strength for SA-106Grade B is
55 ksi.
Therefore: 5%below the minimum specified tensile strength = 0.95 x 55 ksi
= 52.25 ksi
=========================================================
34. A guided-bend specimen that has an open discontinuity in the heat-
affected zone on the convex surface of the specimen after bending that
measures 5/32 in. in length. What should the inspector do?
a) accept the test
b) inspect further for evidence of lack of fusion
c) inspect further for evidence of slag inclusions
d) fail the test
e) both b and c
Answer: D. ASME IX, Acceptance Criteria — Bend Tests [QW-163]
=========================================================
35. A guided-bend specimen that has an open discontinuity on the corner of
the convex surface of the specimen after bending that measures 5/32 in. in
length. What should the inspector do?
a) accept the test
b) inspect further for evidence of lack of fusion
c) inspect further for evidence of slag inclusions
d) fail the test
e) both b and c
Answer: E. ASME IX, Acceptance Criteria — Bend Tests [QW-163]
=========================================================
36. What portion of a transverse weld bend specimen shall be completely
within the bent portion of the specimen after testing?
a) the weld
b) the weldment
c) the weld and heat-affected zone
d) the weld, heat-affected zone, and parent metal

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

Answer: C. ASME IX, Acceptance Criteria — Bend Tests [QW-163]
=========================================================
37. On a guided bend test used to qualify a WPS, cracks occurring on the
corner of the test specimen are acceptable:
A) Under no circumstances
B) Only if they are not associated with the test weld
C) If there is no evidence they were due to slag inclusions
D) If the transverse opening is not larger than 1/8 inch (3mm)
Answer: C. ASME IX, Acceptance Criteria — Bend Tests [QW-163]
=========================================================
38. The rules for impact testing of carbon steel in Section VIII, Div. 1, Carbon
steel vessel materials require what kind(s) of impact tests?
A) Brinnell & Rockwell
B) Izod & Charpy V-notch
C) Charpy V-notch
D) Brinnell
Answer: C. ASME IX, Notch-toughness tests [QW-170]
=========================================================
39. Which testing standard shall Charpy V-notch impact tests conform to for
WPS qualification?
a) ASTM A 37
b) SA-370
c) ASME SA-23
d) the standard specified in the qualified WPS
Answer: B. ASME IX, Notch-toughness tests [QW-170]
=========================================================
40. A discontinuity with a length substantially greater than its width is a
_____discontinuity.
A) Rounded
B) Linear
C) Non-linear
D) Rejectable detect
Answer: B. ASME IX, Acceptance Criteria [QW-191.2.1] /API 577[3.1.45]
=========================================================
41. A Welder and welding operator performance tests by radiography of welds
in test assemblies shall be judged in accordance with_______ .
A. ASME Section V
B. ASME Section IX
C. ASME Section VII
D. The referencing code
Answer: B. ASME IX, RT Acceptance Criteria [QW-191.2.2]

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

42. When is incomplete fusion defined a radiographic linear indication?
a) when the width is more than three times the length
b) when the length is more than two times the width
c) when the volume is more than three times the width
d) when the length is more than three times the width
e) as defined by the radiographic requirements in the qualified WPS
Answer: D. ASME IX, RT Acceptance Criteria [QW-191.2.1]
=========================================================
43. When are slag inclusions defined a radiographic rounded indication?
a) when the width is more than three times the length
b) when the length is three times the width or less
c) when the volume is more than three times the width
d) when the length is more than three times the width
e) as defined by the radiographic requirements in the qualified WPS
Answer: A. ASME IX, RT Acceptance Criteria [QW-191.2.1]
Article II- Welding Procedure Qualifications
=========================================================
44. A welding procedure specification (WPS) is selected for a repair on cold
service piping. Impact testing of the weldment is required. Which of the
following is /are required on the WPS?
A) A record of the welding data used to weld a test coupon.
B) A description of the required repair.
C) All essential, nonessential, and supplementary variables if notch toughness
is required.
D) The results of mechanical testing.
Answer: C. ASME IX, WPS [QW-200.1] / API 577 [6.2]
=========================================================
45. What is the purpose of the WPS?
a) provides direction to the welder while making production welds to ASME
code requirements
b) provides direction to the welder while making production welds to API code
requirements
c) provides verbal rules for making production welds to ASME code
requirements
d) provides rules for qualifying the welder
Answer: A. ASME IX, WPS [QW-200.1] / API 577 [6.1]
=========================================================
46. What is a PQR?
a) it is a record of the welding data and variables used to weld a test coupon
and the test results used to qualify the welder
b) it is a record of the welding data and variables used to weld a test coupon
and the test results used to qualify the welding procedure

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

c) it is a record of the welding data used to test a weld coupon
d) provides rules for making production welds to ASME code requirements
Answer: B. ASME IX, PQR [QW-200.2] /API 577 [6.1/6.3]
=========================================================
47. The purpose of the PQR is to establish the:
A) Properties of the weldment
B) Suitability of the weldment
C) Record for weldment construction
D) None of these are correct per API 577
Answer: A. ASME IX, PQR [QW-200.2] /API 577 [6.1]
=========================================================
48. The purpose of the welding procedure specification (WPS)and the
procedure qualification record (PQR) is to:
A) Document the welding of the test coupon and to provide the direction to the
welder
B) Establish the skill of a welder and a welder’s ability to deposit sound weld
metal
C) Determine the extent of weldment RT required
D) Ensure the weld is free of mechanical defects
Answer: A. ASME IX, WPS/PQR [QW-200.2 /QW-200.2] / API 577 [6.1]
=========================================================
49. The PQR shall record all of the following items except:
A) Manufacturer’s certification of accuracy in the qualification of a WPS
B) The nonessential variables used to weld a test coupon
C) The essential variables used to weld a test coupon
D) Coupon test results
Answer: B. ASME IX, PQR [QW-200.2] /API 577 [6.3]
=========================================================
50. Which of the following must be included in a PQR?
A) Certification signature and date
B) Electrode trade name
C) Current revision and date
D) Base metal thickness range
Answer: A. ASME IX, PQR [QW-200.2] /API 577 [6.4.3]
=========================================================
51. ASME IX assigns base metals a P-Number category in order to reduce the
number of required:
A) WPQs
B) PQRs
C) WPSs
D) None of these
Answer: B. ASME IX, P-Number [QW-200.3 /QW-420] / API 577 [7.2]

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

52. With regard to categorizing grades of steel into P numbers; which of the
following is the most correct statement?
a) These materials can be substituted for each other as long as the thickness is
within 10%
b) Are of the same thickness, same carbon content, comparable strength and
hardness
c) These materials have comparable yield strength but different tensile
strength and hardness
d) These materials have comparable base metal characteristics, weldability,
and mechanical properties
Answer: D. ASME IX, P-Number [QW-200.3 /QW-420] / API 577 [7.2]
=========================================================
53. Welders who qualify with one filler metal are qualified to weld with any
filler metal having the same:
A) F–number
B) P–number
C) A–number
D) A–number & P–number
Answer: A. ASME IX, F-Numbers [QW-430/ Table QW-432] /API 577 [7.3]
=========================================================
54. F-number groupings are based essentially on their usability
characteristics, which fundamentally determine:
A) The chemical composition of the electrode only
B) The chemical composition of the electrode and the weldability
C) The ability of welders to make satisfactory welds using similar composition
filler metals
D) The ability of welders to make satisfactory welds using a given process and
given filler metal
Answer: D ASME IX, F-Numbers [QW-430/ Table QW-432] /API 577 [7.3]
=========================================================
55. Filler metals are assigned F number:
A) To permit indiscriminate substitution to suit production
B) To reduce the number of welding procedures and performance qualification
C) To increase the number of filler metal types that the welder can use
D) To allow for welders to qualify for more than one employer at a time
Answer: B. ASME IX, F-Numbers [QW-430]
=========================================================
56. The ASME IX A-number is based on:
A) The group of base metals having specified impact testing requirements
B) The weldability characteristics of a group of metal alloys
C) The chemical composition of the deposited weld metal
D) The chemical composition of the electrode

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

Answer: C. ASME IX, A-Number [QW-440/ Table QW-442] / API 577 [7.5]
=========================================================
57. A PQR test uses SMAW process to weld on a 5/8-inch-thick plate. Maximum
thickness of production weld qualified is:
A) 5/8 inch
B) 1 inch
C) 1-1/4 inches
D) 1-3/4 inches
Answer: C. ASME IX, PQR Qualified thickness [Table QW-451.1]
=========================================================
58. Which of the following tests are always required to qualify a groove weld
WPS?
A) Tension and Charpy
B) Tension and bend
C) Radiographic and bend
D) Radiographic and ultrasonic
Answer: B. ASME IX, PQR Qualified thickness [Table QW-451.1]
=========================================================
59. What is base metal of [Link].53?
A) steel alloys
B) nickel base alloys
C) Titanium alloy material
D) copper base alloys
Answer: C. ASME IX, Base Metal Groupings[QW-420 / Table QW/QB-422 ]
=========================================================
60. What is base metal of SB-265 Gr.9 ?
A) steel alloys
B) nickel base alloys
C) Titanium alloy material
D) copper base alloys
Answer: C. ASME IX, Grouping of Base Metals [ Table QW/QB-422]
=========================================================
61. What is the WPS maximum fillet weld size qualified on a joint with equal
legs of ½ in. and a throat size of 3/8 in.?
A) 2T
B) 2t
C) 1.1T
C) all fillet sizes
Answer: D. ASME IX, Fillet-Weld Tests [Table QW-451.3]

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

62. What is the WPS maximum fillet weld size, base metal thickness, and
diameter qualified on a pipe coupon with 3/8 in. thickness?
A) 3/8 in. throat, 2T thickness, and 4 in. diameter
B) 3/8 in. throat, 2t thickness, and 4 in. diameter
C) 3/8 in. leg, 2T thickness, and 4 in. diameter
D) all fillet sizes
Answer: D. ASME IX, Fillet Welds Qualified by Groove-Weld Tests [Table QW-
451.4]
=========================================================
63. What is the F-No. of SFA-5.4 classification E309L-16, stainless steel
electrodes for
shielded metal arc welding?
A) F-No. 1
B) F-No. 3
C) F-No. 4
D) F-No. 5
Answer: D. ASME IX, F-Numbers [QW-430/ Table QW-432]
=========================================================
64. What is the F-No. of SFA-5.18 classification ER70S-4, carbon steel
electrodes and rods for gas shielded arc welding?
A) F-No. 1
B) F-No. 3
C) F-No. 4
D) F-No. 6
E) F-No. 22
Answer: D. ASME IX, F-Numbers [QW-430/ Table QW-432]
=========================================================
65. Which of the following is an essential variable for shielded metal arc
welding (SMAW) welding procedure specification (WPS)?
A) Welding technique
B) Groove design
C) F-number
D) American Welding Society class for filler number
Answer: C. ASME IX, SMAW [Table QW-253]
=========================================================
66. Which of the following is an essential variable for shielded metal arc
welding (SMAW) welding procedure specification (WPS)?
A) Upward or downward progression
B) Change in groove design
C) Decrease of over 100°F in preheat
D) Addition or deletion of backing
Answer: C. ASME IX, SMAW [Table QW-253]

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

67. After temper Bead welding for grove weld. if hardness testing is used,
what is the location of hardness to be measured?
a) Above 0.004 (1mm) the root.
b) Below 0.004 (1mm) the face reinforcement (Cap).
c) Both A and B are corrected for grove weld.
d) Prohibted.
Answer: C. Temper Bead Welding [Figure QW-462.12]
=========================================================
68. Does the WPS show the maximum base metal thickness range that could
be qualified by the PQR EM2-1?
A) Yes
B) No, it should be 3/16 inch to 1.25 inches
C) No, it should be 3/16 inch to 2.50 inches
D) No, it should be 3/16 inch to 8.00 inches
Answer: C. ASME IX, Refer to WPS/PQR EM-2-1
ASME IX, table QW-253 &Table QW-451.1, Big T column for WPS qualified
range Look at table QW-253 and check the brief of variables for base metals
(QW-403). Note that QW-403.8 specifies that ‘change’ of thickness T qualified
is an essential variable.
The PQR tells us that under base metals (QW-403) the coupon thickness T =
1.25 in.
The WPS tells us that under base metals (QW-403) the Base Metal: Groove
0.1875'' to 0.8640''.
QW-451.1 tells us that for a test coupon of thickness 3/4 – 1 1/2 in the base
material range qualified on the WPS is 3/16 in to 2T (3/16 in to 2.5’’).
The correct answer must therefore be (C). No, it should be 3/16 inch to 2.50
inches
=========================================================
69. Does the WPS show the Weld Metal Deposited Thickness range that could
be qualified by the PQR EM2-1?
A) Yes
B) No, it should be ‘unlimited’
C) No, it should be 8 in maximum
D) No, it should be it should be 2.5 in maximum
Answer: D. ASME IX, Refer to WPS/PQR EM-2-1
ASME IX, table QW-253 &Table QW-451.1 small t column for WPS qualified
range Look at table QW-253 and note how QW-404.30 ‘change in deposited
weld metal thickness t’ is an essential variable (and refers to QW-451 for the
maximum thickness qualified).
The PQR under QW-404 filler states weld metal thickness t= 1.25 in.

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

The WPS under QW-404 filler states the Weld Metal Deposited thickness range
0.1875'' to 0.8640''. QW-451.1 states that if t > 3/4 in then the maximum
qualified weld metal thickness = 2T,
where T = base metal thickness. (therefore t = 2T = 2.5 in).
The correct answer must therefore be (D). No, it should be it should be 2.5 in
maximum
=========================================================
70. Does the WPS show the electrode that could be qualified by the PQR EM2-
1?
A) Yes
B) No, it should be E7018 or use the alternate electrode E7016 or E7015 (weld
is rejected)
C) No, the only alternate electrode is an E6010
D) No, provided the electrode is an E7010-A1
Answer: B. ASME IX, Refer to WPS/PQR EM-2-1
Does the WPS show the electrode that could be qualified by the PQR EM2-1?
ASME IX, table QW-253 &Table QW-432 [Link] WPS qualified range
Note QW-404.4 shows that a change in F-number from table QW-432 is an
essential variable.
This is addressed on the PQR which shows the E7018 electrode as an F-
number 4.
Table QW-432 and the WPS both show the E7010 electrode is an F-number 3.
The correct answer must therefore be (B) No, it should be E7018 or use the
alternate electrode E7016 or E7015
=========================================================
71. The preheat temperature shown on the WPS should be:
a. 60° F minimum
b. 100° F minimum
c. 250° F minimum
d. 300° F minimum
Answer: B. ASME IX, Refer to WPS/PQR EM-2-1
ASME IX, Table QW-253 & QW-406.1 Preheat rules
QW-406.1 shows that a decrease of preheat > 100 F (55 C) is defined as an
essential variable.
The PQR shows a preheat of 100 F, which means the minimum shown on the
WPS must be 100 F as minimum and not ‘50’ as shown.
The correct answer must therefore be (B). 100° F minimum
=========================================================
72. Does the PQR properly qualify the WPS regarding Preheat requirements?
A) Yes, the preheat on the PQR covers all ASME IX rules for WPS application
B) Yes, but only because the interpass temperature range is required for P-No
1

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

C) No, because PQR preheat temps were performed outside of essential
variable limits
D) Neither no or yes because there is still an outstanding issue to be resolved
in writing
Answer: A. ASME IX, Refer to WPS/PQR EM-2-1
ASME IX, Table QW-253 Table (SMAW) & QW-406.1 Preheat rules
QW-406.1 shows that a decrease of preheat > 100 F (55 C) is defined as an
essential variable.
The PQR addressed a preheat of 100 F, which means the minimum shown on
the WPS must be 100 F as minimum and not ‘50’ as shown.
The correct answer must therefore be (A). Yes, the preheat on the PQR covers
all ASME IX rules for WPS application
=========================================================
73. Does the PQR properly qualify the WPS regarding PWHT requirements?
A) Yes
B) Yes, but only because the thickness range covers the entire WPS range
C) No, because the PQR does not show evidence that PWHT was performed
D) No, because the PQR does not cover the lower transformation temperature
range
Answer: C. ASME IX, Refer to WPS/PQR EM-2-1
ASME IX, Table QW-253 Table (SMAW) & QW-407.1 PWHT rules
The PQR not addressed PWHT.
=========================================================
74. Bend test results shown on PQR EM2-1 are:
A) Acceptable
B) Unacceptable, wrong type of bend specimen was used
C) Unacceptable, because multiple specimens are required
D) Unacceptable, because of an insufficient number of bend specimens
Answer: B. ASME IX, Refer to WPS/PQR EM-2-1
ASME IX, Table QW-451.1 & QW-160 bends tests required.
The PQR addressed Four face bend tests.
QW-406.1 shows that Four SIDE bend tests a required are required.
The correct answer must therefore be (B). Unacceptable, wrong type of bend
specimen was used
=========================================================
75. Do tensile test results shown on PQR EM2-1 meet the requirements for
WPS?
A) Yes
B) No, specimen 1 does not meet requirements
C) No, specimens 1 & 3 do not meet requirements
D) No, because multiple specimens cannot be used
Answer: B. ASME IX, Refer to WPS/PQR EM-2-1

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

ASME IX, Table QW-451.1 & QW-150 (151/152/153) & QW-422 Tables
Note: Specimens are ½ size (reduced t from 1.25 in), need 4 not 2 per Table
451.1 QW-153.1 Tensile Strength.
The minimum procedure qualification tensile values are found in table QW/QB
422. Checking through the figures for material SA-285 grade C shows a
minimum specified tensile value of 55 ksi (55,000 psi).
In order to pass the tension test, the specimen shall have a tensile strength
that is not less than the minimum specified tensile strength of the weld metal.
So specimen No. (2&4) mentioned on PQR breaking in the weld metal is OK at
55,000 and specimen No. (1) is rejected if the specimen breaks in the base
metal outside of the weld or weld interface, the test shall be accepted as
meeting the requirements provided the strength is not more than 5% below
the minimum specified tensile strength of the base metal. = 0.95 x specified
tensile strength =55,000 x 0.95 = 52,250, so specimen # 3 is OK breaking at
53,000.
The correct answer must therefore be (B). No, specimen 1 does not meet
requirements
Article III- Welding Performance Qualifications
=========================================================
76. The Welders Performance Qualification Record documents:
A) That the weldment provides the required properties.
B) The suitability of a weld process for a given service.
C) The ability of the manufacturer to control the welder.
D) The welder’s ability to make sound welds.
Answer: D. ASME IX, QW-301 Tests / API 577 Welder qualification [8.1]
=========================================================
77. The responsibility for qualifying repair welders is restricted to the:
A) Welding Qualification Test Company employed by the owner/user
B) Owner/user of the site where the repaired equipment will be used
C) Contractor or manufacturer employing the welder
D) Welder’s supervisor
Answer: C. ASME IX, Qualification Tests [QW-301.2] / API 577 Welder
qualification [8.1]
=========================================================
78. Welders may be qualified by radiographic examination of groove welds,
with the exception of:
A) SAW with silicone-based flux.
B) GMAW globular transfer.
C) GMAW pulsed-arc.
D) GMAW-S (short-circuiting).
Answer: D. ASME IX, Groove Welds — General. [QW-303.1] /API 577 (WPQ)
[8.2]

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

79. Under which circumstance may a welder be qualified by a production weld
instead of a qualification test coupon?
A) When minimum 6 inches(150mm) of welder’s first production weld pass a
specified RT exam
B) When a coupon is removed from a production weld and mechanically tested
C) When a welder has welded with a specific process within past 12 months
D) Under no circumstance may a welder qualify by this method
Answer: A. ASME IX, Examination [QW-304.1]/ API 577 (WPQ) [8.2]
=========================================================
80. under what circumstance must a welder requalify?
A) When the welder’s foreman discovers that the welder is not making
acceptable welds
B) When the welder’s has not welded with the same P number in the previous
3 months
C) When the welder’s has not worked as a welder for the previous 2 months
D) When the welder’s has not requalified within past 12 months
Answer: D. ASME IX, Expiration of Qualification [QW-322.1] /API 577 (WPQ)
[8.2]
=========================================================
81. Which of the following circumstances requires re-qualification of a
welder?
A) When there is reason to doubt the welder’s ability to deposit sound weld
metal
B) When the welder has not welded on a pressure vessel for six months
C) When the welder has been laid off for two months
D) When the welder has not welded a qualification coupon within the past
twelve months
Answer: A. ASME IX, Expiration of Qualification [QW-322.1] /API 577 (WPQ)
[8.2]
=========================================================
82. A welder’s performance qualification will expire if he/she has not welded
with a specific process for more than which of the following?
A) One month
B) Four months
C) Three months
D) Six months
Answer: D. ASME IX, Expiration of Qualification [QW-322.1] /API 577 (WPQ)
[8.2]

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

83. When a pipe qualification coupon for welders or welding operators has
failed radiographic examination, the immediate retest shall be by
radiographic examination. The weld length shall be _________________
A. One complete pipe weld
B. Two complete pipe weld
C. Two pipe welds for a total of 12” of weld
D. Two 12” plate coupons
Answer: C. ASME IX, Immediate Retest Using Volumetric NDE [QW-321.3]
=========================================================
84. A welder is tested on ½ inch thick pipe in the 5G position. How many face
bends are required for this test?
A. 1
B. 2
C. 3
D. 4
Answer: D. ASME IX, Type of Test Required [QW-302/Table QW -452.1(a)]
=========================================================
85. If a welder is qualified in the 1G position with a groove weld in plate, what
positions is he/she qualified to weld in?
a) Vertical
b) Flat
c) Horizontal
d) Overhead
Answer: B. ASME IX, Limits of Qualified Positions and Diameters [QW-
303/Table QW-461.9]
=========================================================
86. A welder qualified by welding in the 5G position, the welder can’t weld?
a) Vertical
b) Flat
c) Horizontal
d) Overhead
Answer: C. ASME IX, Limits of Qualified Positions and Diameters [QW-
303/Table QW-461.9]
=========================================================
87. A welder is trying to qualify for all positions by welding a six-inch pipe
coupon. Which of the following positions are required to accomplish this?
A) 1G and 2G
B) 1G and 3G
C) 2G and 3G
D) 2G and 5G
Answer: D. ASME IX, Limits of Qualified Positions and Diameters [QW-
303/Table QW-461.9]

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

88. A welder at being qualified has welded a 5/8-inch thick test coupon in the
3G position. Which of the following tests are required for the welder to be
qualified?
A) One face bend test and one side bend test
B) Two face bend test and one root bend test
C) one face bend test and one root bend test, or two side bend tests.
D) Two face bend test and two root bend test, or four side bend tests.
Answer: C. ASME IX, Type of Test Required [QW-302/Table QW -452.1(a)]
=========================================================
89. What tests must be performed to qualify a welder performance coupon
that has a diameter of NPS 4 and is 3/4 in. thick?
A) 1 face and 1 root bend
B) either 2 side bends or from Note (3) one face and 1 root bend
C) 2 side bends
D) 2 face and 2 root bends
E) 2 side bends or 2 face and 2 root bends
Answer: C. ASME IX, Type of Test Required [QW-302/Table QW -452.1(a)]
=========================================================
90. What is the qualified diameter range for a welder performance coupon
that has a diameter of NPS 4 and is welded using SMAW?
A) size welded to unlimited
B) 1 in. to unlimited
C) 1 in. to 2-7/8 in. (NPS 2-1/2)
D) 2-7/8 in. to unlimited
E) NPS 2 to unlimited
Answer: D. ASME IX, Limits of Qualified Positions and Diameters [QW-
303/Table QW-452.3]
=========================================================
91. What qualified position(s) result from a performance coupon with a
groove weld in a plate is qualified in the 3G and 4G positions, using GTAW, for
fillet welding plate and pipe?
A) F, H
B) F, H, V
C) F, H, O
D) All
E) SP, F
Answer: D. ASME IX, Limits of Qualified Positions and Diameters [QW-
303/Table QW-461.9]
=========================================================
92. When can a welder be qualified for SMAW by using a production weld
instead of a
coupon weld?

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

a) Never
b) When the coupon removed from one of the welder’s production weld passes
mechanical testing
c) When six inches of the welder’s first production weld pass the specified
radiographic examination
d) When the welder has welded on plate steel within the past twelve months
Answer: C. ASME IX, Examination [QW-304.1]/ API 577 (WPQ) [8.2]
=========================================================
93. Welders who qualify on the required tests for plate groove welds:
a) May weld on groove welds only
b) Are also qualified on all pipe groove welds
c) Are also qualified on some fillet welds
d) Must additionally pass the fillet weld test
Answer: C. ASME IX, Limits of Qualified Positions and Diameters [QW-303.1 /
Table 452.6]
=========================================================
94. If a welder is qualified in the 1G position with a groove weld in plate, what
positions is he/she qualified to weld in?
a) Vertical
b) Flat
c) Horizontal
d) Overhead
Answer: B. ASME IX, Limits of Qualified Positions and Diameters [QW-
303/Table QW-461.9]

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

 6. API 577 2013 Edition
1. How many welds does API 577 require to be inspected?
A) None
B) All welds
C) Representative number
D) 50% of welds
Answer: C. API 577, Scope [1]
=========================================================
2. An inspector notices that a welding arc is being deflected from its normal
path because of magnetic forces, the welder describes the problem to the
inspector as________
a. cracks
b. short circuiting
c. arc blow
d. insufficient welding current
e. all of the above
Answer: C. API 577, arc blow [3.1.4]
=========================================================
3. A fusion weld made without filler metal is _______________.
A) Brazing
B) SMAW weld
C) Autogenous weld
D) SAW weld
Answer: C. API 577, autogenous weld [3.1.8]
=========================================================
4. The arrangement of direct current arc welding leads in which the electrode
is the negative pole and the work piece is the positive pole of the welding arc
is ______________?
A) DCEN
B) DCEP
C) AC
D) AC/DC
Answer: A. API 577, direct current electrode negative DCEN [3.1.20]
=========================================================
5. The size of the fillet weld refers to the dimension of the welds:
A) Throat
B) Leg
C) Reinforcement
D) Toe
Answer: B. API 577, fillet weld size [3.1.27]

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

6. What is a non-standard term indicating a weld discontinuity in which
fusion did not occur between weld metal and fusion faces or adjoining weld
beads?
a) lack of adhesion
b) lack of penetration
c) lack of fusion
d) non-weld fusion
Answer: C. API 577, lack of fusion (LOF) [3.1.42]
=========================================================
7. A discontinuity with a length substantially greater than its width is a _____
discontinuity.
A) Rounded
B) Linear
C) Non-linear
D) Rejectable detect
Answer: B. API 577, linear discontinuity [3.1.45]/ ASME IX [QW-191.2.1]
8. Which of the following is used when it is deemed necessary or helpful to
control distortion, to relieve residual stresses, or to improve the quality of the
weld?
A) Impact test
B) Tensile test
C) Fatigue test
D) Peening
Answer: D. API 577, Peening [3.1.50]/ ASME VIII. [UW-39]
=========================================================
9. Which discontinuity is normally found at the weld toe or root surface?
A) Under fill
B) Concavity
C) Overlap
D) Incomplete fusion
Answer: C. API 577, Discontinuities [9.1/ Table 2] / overlap [3.1.48]
=========================================================
10. Which of the following best describes the term undercut?
A) An incomplete bonding between the parent metal and filler metal under the
weld
B) A lack of fusion under the cap that appears as a “cut” on a radiographic
image
C) A groove melted into the base metal adjacent to weld toe or weld root
D) Incomplete filling of the weld root
Answer: C. API 577, Discontinuities [9.1/ Table 2] / overlap [3.1.48]

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

11. During the welding inspection, an inspector identifies a non-conformance
to the specification and brings it to the attention of those responsible for the
work. What should be done before welding proceeds further?
a) the non-conformance should be documented
b) the non-conformance should be completely removed and re-inspected
c) the non-conformance should be documented and re-inspected
d) the non-conformance should be immediately re-inspected
Answer: B. API 577, Non-Conformances and Defects [4.5]
=========================================================
12. ASNT recommended Practice SNT-TC-1A is a:
A) Manual covering nondestructive examination (NDE) safety procedures
B) Procedure for the visual examination of piping systems
C) Document covering NDE personnel qualifications
D) Document covering NDE procedures
Answer: C. API 577, NDE Examiner Certification [4.6] / ASME V, General [T-
120]
=========================================================
13. What is the purpose of the WPS?
a) provides direction to the welder while making production welds to ASME
code requirements
b) provides direction to the welder while making production welds to API code
requirements
c) provides verbal rules for making production welds to ASME code
requirements
d) provides rules for qualifying the welder
Answer: A. API 577, WELDING PROCEDURE [6.1]
=========================================================
14. Which of the following welding methods results in a highly directed
stream of discrete drops that are accelerated by ARC forces?
A) GMAW spray transfer.
B) GMAW globular transfer.
C) GMAW short-circuit transfer.
D) FCAW Flux-cored arc welding.
Answer: A. API 577, GMAW [5.4.4]
=========================================================
15. Which of the following welding methods encompasses the lowest range of
welding currents and electrode diameters associated with the GMAW Process?
A) GMAW spray transfer.
B) GMAW globular transfer.
C) GMAW short-circuit transfer.
D) FCAW Flux-cored arc welding.
Answer: C. API 577, GMAW [5.4.2]

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

16. A Limitations of Stud welding is that:
A) A power supply cable of providing high amperage at 100%duty cycle is
required
B) The process is primary suitable for only carbon steel and low-alloy steel
C) it is difficult shield the weld zone properly in drafty environments
D) the requirement is more complex, more costly, and less portable.
Answer: B. API 577, Stud Arc Welding (SW) [5.7.3]
=========================================================
17. What is a PQR?
a) it is a record of the welding data and variables used to weld a test coupon
and the test results used to qualify the welder
b) it is a record of the welding data and variables used to weld a test coupon
and the test results used to qualify the welding procedure
c) it is a record of the welding data used to test a weld coupon
d) provides rules for making production welds to ASME code requirements
Answer: B. API 577, WELDING PROCEDURE [6.1/6.3]
=========================================================
18. The purpose of the PQR is to establish the:
A) Properties of the weldment
B) Suitability of the weldment
C) Record for weldment construction
D) None of these are correct per API 577
Answer: B. API 577, WELDING PROCEDURE [6.1]
=========================================================
19. The purpose of the welding procedure specification (WPS)and the
procedure qualification record (PQR) is to:
A) Document the welding of the test coupon and to provide the direction to the
welder
B) Establish the skill of a welder and a welder’s ability to deposit sound weld
metal
C) Determine the extent of weldment RT required
D) Ensure the weld is free of mechanical defects
Answer: A. API 577, WELDING PROCEDURE [6.1]
=========================================================
20. A welding procedure specification (WPS) is selected for a repair on cold
service piping.
Impact testing of the weldment is required. Which of the following is /are
required on the WPS?
A) A record of the welding data used to weld a test coupon.
B) A description of the required repair.
C) All essential, nonessential, and supplementary variables if notch toughness
is required.

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

D) The results of mechanical testing.
Answer: C. API 577, Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) [6.2]
=========================================================
21. The PQR shall record all of the following items except:
A) Manufacturer’s certification of accuracy in the qualification of a WPS
B) The nonessential variables used to weld a test coupon
C) The essential variables used to weld a test coupon
D) Coupon test results
Answer: B. API 577, WELDING PROCEDURE [6.3]
=========================================================
22. Which of the following must be included in a PQR?
A) Certification signature and date
B) Electrode trade name
C) Current revision and date
D) Base metal thickness range
Answer: A. API 577, Reviewing a WPS and PQR [6.4.3]
=========================================================
23. ASME IX assigns base metals a P-Number category in order to reduce the
number of required:
A) WPQs
B) PQRs
C) WPSs
D) None of these
Answer: B. API 577, P-Number Assignment to Base Metals [7.2]
=========================================================
24. Welders who qualify with one filler metal are qualified to weld with any
filler metal having the same:
A) F–number
B) P–number
C) A–number
D) A–number & P–number
Answer: A. API 577, F-Number Assignment to Filler Metals [7.3]
=========================================================
25. F-number groupings are based essentially on their usability
characteristics, which fundamentally determine:
A) The chemical composition of the electrode only
B) The chemical composition of the electrode and the weldability
C) The ability of welders to make satisfactory welds using similar composition
filler metals
D) The ability of welders to make satisfactory welds using a given process and
given filler metal
Answer: D. API 577, F-Number Assignment to Filler Metals [7.3]

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

26. The ASME IX A-number is based on:
A) The group of base metals having specified impact testing requirements
B) The weldability characteristics of a group of metal alloys
C) The chemical composition of the deposited weld metal
D) The chemical composition of the electrode
Answer: C. API 577, A-Number [7.5]
=========================================================
27. What should an inspector do when confronted with electrodes or fluxes
that have become wet?
a) electrodes or fluxes that have become wet should be dried
b) electrodes or fluxes that have become wet should be re-baked
c) electrodes or fluxes that have become wet should be discarded
d) electrodes or fluxes that have become wet should be quarantined for
further evaluation
Answer: C. API 577, Consumable Storage and Handling [7.7]
=========================================================
28. The responsibility for qualifying repair welders is restricted to the:
A) Welding Qualification Test Company employed by the owner/user
B) Owner/user of the site where the repaired equipment will be used
C) Contractor or manufacturer employing the welder
D) Welder’s supervisor
Answer: C. API 577, Welder qualification [8.1]
=========================================================
29. The Welders Performance Qualification Record documents:
A) That the weldment provides the required properties.
B) The suitability of a weld process for a given service.
C) The ability of the manufacturer to control the welder.
D) The welder’s ability to make sound welds.
Answer: D. API 577, Welder qualification [8.1]
=========================================================
30. Welder performance qualification expires if a welding process is not used
during a:
A) 3-month period
B) Six-month period
C) Nine-month period
D) Twelve-month period
Answer: B. API 577, Welder Performance Qualification (WPQ) [8.2]
=========================================================
31. Welders may be qualified by radiographic examination of groove welds,
with the exception of:
A) SAW with silicone-based flux.
B) GMAW globular transfer.

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

C) GMAW pulsed-arc.
D) GMAW-S (short-circuiting).
Answer: D. API 577, Welder Performance Qualification (WPQ) [8.2]
=========================================================
32. Under which circumstance may a welder be qualified by a production weld
instead of a qualification test coupon?
A) When minimum 6 inches(150mm) of welder’s first production weld pass a
specified RT exam
B) When a coupon is removed from a production weld and mechanically tested
C) When a welder has welded with a specific process within past 12 months
D) Under no circumstance may a welder qualify by this method
Answer: A. API 577, Welder Performance Qualification (WPQ) [8.2]
=========================================================
33. under what circumstance must a welder requalify?
A) When the welder’s foreman discovers that the welder is not making
acceptable welds
B) When the welder’s has not welded with the same P number in the previous
3 months
C) When the welder’s has not worked as a welder for the previous 2 months
D) When the welder’s has not requalified within past 12 months
Answer: D. API 577, Welder Performance Qualification (WPQ) [8.2]
=========================================================
34. Welder’s qualification can be revoked if:
A) There is reason to question their ability to make welds.
B) They violate their WPS more than once (includes high repair rates)
C) They violate their WPS repeatedly (includes high repair rates)
D) None of the above is correct per API 577
Answer: A. API 577, Welder Performance Qualification (WPQ) [8.2]
=========================================================
35. If radiographic exam is used for qualification of a welder or welding
operator, the minimum length of coupon to be examined is any of the
following items EXCEPT:
A) 3 feet (0.91 meters) for welding operators (ASME IX Rule)
B) 6 inches (152.4 mm) minimum in any case (ASME IX Rule)
C) The entire circumference for their first three production joints
D) The entire weld circumference for pipe coupons (Typically Size 2 NPS &
Size 8 NPS used)
Answer: C. API 577, Welder Performance Qualification (WPQ) [8.2]
=========================================================
36. Undercut can be corrected by:
A) Proper heat input & proper welding technique
B) Reduce travel speed and control arc length

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

C) Proper heat input & proper joint design
D) Reduce travel speed
Answer: C. API 577, Discontinuities [9.1 /Table 6]
=========================================================
37. Lack of side wall fusion (LOF) in weld is relevant to which welding process
from the following:
A) SAW with silicone-based flux.
B) GMAW globular transfer.
C) GMAW pulsed-arc.
D) GMAW-S (short-circuiting).
Answer: D. API 577, Discontinuities [9.1 /Table 6]
=========================================================
38. which of the following method is most suitable for detecting lamination?
a. RT
b. UT
c. ET
d. LT
e. AET
Answer: B. API 577, Discontinuities [9.1 /Table 5]
=========================================================
39. [The most extensively used NDE method for welds is:]/[ inspection
method that has globally agreement ] /[ universal NDT] .
A) Penetrant Testing
B) Visual testing
C) Radiographic testing
D) Magnetic Particle Testing
Answer: B. API 577, Visual Examination (VT) [9.3.1]
=========================================================
40. Direct visual examination is conducted when access is sufficient to place
the eye:
A) Within 6 in–24 in (150–600 mm) of exam surface & at an angle not less
than 20ᴼ to surface
B) Within 6 in–12 in (150–300 mm) of exam surface & at an angle not less than
20ᴼ to surface
C) Within 12in-24 in (300-600 mm) of exam surface & at an angle not less
than 20ᴼ to surface
D) None of these is correct
Answer: D. API 577, Visual Examination (VT) [9.3.1]
=========================================================
41. Magnetic particle examination is effective in:
A) Locating surface discontinuities of ferromagnetic materials
B) Locating surface or near surface discontinuities of ferromagnetic materials

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

C) Locating surface or near surface discontinuities of ferromagnetic and
paramagnetic materials
D) None of these are correct
Answer: B. API 577, Magnetic Particle Examination (MT) [9.4.1]
=========================================================
42. For added sensitivity, which of the following PT techniques may be used to
detect fine linear type indications?
A) Fluorescent penetrant technique.
B) Color Contrast Solvent Removable Visible Dye Penetrant.
C) Color Contrast Post emulsifiable Visible Dye Penetrant.
D) Color Contrast Water washable Visible Dye Penetrant.
Answer: A. API 577, Liquid Penetrant Examination (PT) [9.6.2]
=========================================================
43. Which of the following is not an advantage of using radiography to
determine pipe thickness?
A) Piping insulation can remain intact during inspection
B) The cost of inspection is lower than for other methods
C) Film negatives provide a permanent record of the pipe condition
D) Isotope radiography is not an ignition source in the presence of
hydrocarbons
Answer: B. API 577, Radiographic Examination (RT) [9.8.1]
=========================================================
44. What is the cause for rejection of the “B” image on a film due to excessive
backscatter?
A) Light image of the Letter B
B) Dark image of the Letter B
C) Any image of the Letter B
D) No image of the Letter B
Answer: A. API 577, Excessive Backscatter [[Link]] /ASME V [T-284]]
=========================================================
45. When reviewing RT film, a darkened perfectly straight line can be seen in
the very centre of the root pass (lightest area). The length of the line is about
75mm long. It is likely which type of discontinuity?
A) Incomplete penetration
B) Incomplete fusion
C) Wormhole porosity
D) Crack
Answer: A. API 577, Incomplete or Lack of Penetration (LOP) [Figure 35]
=========================================================
46. Which of these imperfections may appear as a light white spot using
radiography?
A) Cracks

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

B) Incomplete Penetration
C) Porosity
D) Tungsten Inclusion
Answer: D. API 577, Tungsten Inclusions [Figure 45]
=========================================================
47. Which of the following imperfections may appear as a dark round spots
using radiography?
A) Cracks and Incomplete Penetration
B) Porosity or Burn through
C) Slag and Incomplete fusion
D) Laminations
Answer: B. General NDE knowledge
=========================================================
48. A welding discontinuity is:
A) Condition of being imperfect/departure of quality characteristic from its
intended condition.
B) An imperfection or unintentional nonconformance that is detectable by
NDE.
C) A lack of cohesion; an interruption in the normal physical structure
D) The response or evidence from the application of NDE.
Answer: C. API 577, Terminology [9.12.2/ Table 8]
=========================================================
49. The temperature of the calibration standard should be within _______of
the part to be examined
A) 25°F
B) 50°F
C) 75°F
D) 150°F
Answer: A. API 577, Ultrasonic Examination [[Link]]
=========================================================
50. The rate of search unit movement should not exceed
A) 3 in. per second
B) 4 in. per second
C) 6 in. per second
D) 10 in. per second
Answer: C. API 577, Ultrasonic Examination [9.9.5]
=========================================================
51. The structure of a deposited weld is akin to:
A) Hot-formed metal
B) Forging
C) Casting
D) Heat-treated metal

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

Answer: C. API 577, Metallurgy [10.2.1]
=========================================================
52. resistance to plastic deformation by indentationis called:
a. strength
b. toughness
c. hardness
d. ductility
Answer: C. API 577, Hardness [10.4.4]
=========================================================
53. The ability of a metal to absorb energy and deform plastically before
fracturing is called:
a. strength
b. ductility
c. hardness
d. toughness
Answer: D. API 577, Toughness [10.4.5]
=========================================================
54. The temperature at which a material fracture mode changes from ductile
to brittle is called:
a. Cure temperature
b. Melting temperature
c. transition temperature
d. Toughness temperature
Answer: C. API 577, Toughness [10.4.5]
=========================================================
55. Hardness testing of the weld and HAZ is often required to assure the
welding process, and any PWHT, resulted in__________
A) meets physical properties
B) meets ductility
C) acceptable soft result
D) meets toughness
Answer: C. API 577, Hardness Testing for PQR and Production Welds [9.10.1]
=========================================================
56. What is maximum Brinnell hardness number allowed for welding 2.25Cr–
1Mo material?
A) BHN 200
B) BHN 225
C) BHN 241
D) None of these
Answer: C. API 577, Hardening [10.7/Table 11]

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

57. Who is responsible for the quality craftsmanship of welding?
A) Welder
B) Owner /user
C) Welding inspector
D) API Authorized Inspection inspector
E) Piping Engineer
Answer: A. API 577, Tasks During Welding Operations [[Link] (a)]
=========================================================
58. Calibrations shall include the complete ultrasonic system and shall be
performed_____________
A) prior to use of the system in the thickness range under examination
B) after to use of the system in the thickness range under examination
C) prior to use, whenever the power source is interrupted or changed, and at
the completion of the examination or series of examinations
D) at least once every 1 hours
E) at least once every 8 hours
Answer: A. API 577, Ultrasonic Examination System Calibration [[Link]]
=========================================================
59. which of these types of electrode will give a deep penetration
characteristic?
A) Cellulosic type electrodes (e.g. E7010, E7011, and E7048 )
B) Cellulosic type electrodes (e.g. E6010, E6011, or E7010)
C) Low hydrogen type electrodes (e.g. E7016, E7018, and E7048)
D) Low hydrogen type electrodes (e.g. E6016, E6018, or E7010)
E) None of the above
Answer: B. API 577, Electrode Considerations [11.2.2]
=========================================================
60. Which of the following is common term used to reflect the act of
penetrating a thin component with the welding arc while hot tap welding or
in-service welding.?
A) burn-through
B) Internal (Root) Undercut
C) Excessive Penetration
D) Lack of Penetration (LOP)
E) Lack of Side Wall Fusion(LOF)
Answer: A. API 577, burn-through [3.1.13/Figure 40]
=========================================================
61. An advantages of Stud welding is that:
A) a power supply capable of providing high amperage at 100 % duty cycle is
recommended.
B) produces repeatable high quality welds for large weldments and repetitive
short welds.

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

B) weld is not visible during the welding process.
C) equipment required is more costly and extensive, and less portable.
D) process is limited to shop applications and flat position.
Answer: B. API 577, Submerged Arc Welding (SAW) [5.6.3]
=========================================================
62. The primary reason for postweld heat treatment is _______________
A) Change the microstructure of the weld
B) Increase the tensile strength of the weld
C) to relieve the residual stresses in a welded fabrication
D) Increase the impact strength of the weld
E) Provide a method of oven heating for the removal of gas pokets trapped in
the weld
Answer: C. API 577, Postweld Heat Treatment [10.6]
=========================================================
63. The number 2 in the above figure represents which of the following?
A) Root Opening
B) Root Face
C) Groove Face
D) Bevel Angle
E) Groove Weld Size:
Answer: B. API 577, Groove Weld Nomenclature [Figure A.5]
=========================================================
64. What test is used to determine material notch toughness?
A) Impact test
B) Bend test
C) Tensile test
D) Elongation test
Answer: A. API 577, Toughness [10.4.5]
=========================================================
65. A carbon-steel piping circuit in caustic service that was originally stress-
relieved:
A) Should be examined at twice the inspection interval of systems that are not
stress-relieved.
B) Should be checked for cracking with magnetic-particle testing.
C) Requires Brinell hardness testing at the first inspection interval
D) Should never be hammer tested.
Answer: B. API 577, Caustic Service [11.4]
=========================================================
66. Which of the following electrodes are suitable for GMAW and GTAW?
A) E 7018
B) ER707-E
C) ER71T

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

D) ER70S-6
Answer: D. API 577, Annex A [Figure A.7]
=========================================================
67. Radiograph testing (RT) for detecting _______
A) structurally significant defects
B) lamination.
C) temperature of components.
D) Subsurface crack.
Answer: D. API 577, Radiographic Examination (RT) [9.8.1]
=========================================================
68. Iridium 192 is normally used for performing radiography on steel with a
thickness range of ______________
A) 0.25 in. to 3.0 in. (6.3 mm to 76.2 mm).
B) 1.5 in. to 7.0 in. (38 mm to 178 mm).
C) 0.25 in. to 7.0 in. (6.3 mm to 178 mm).
D) 0.5 in. to 1.5 in. (13 mm to 38 mm).
Answer: A. API 577, Radiographic Examination (RT) [9.8.4]
NOTE: -
For weld inspection, typically radioactive isotopes of Iridium 192 or Cobalt
60 are used. X-ray machines may also be used.
Cobalt 60 is used for steel thickness of 1.5 in. to 7.0 in. (38 mm to 178 mm).
The minimum or maximum thickness that can be radiographed for a given
material is determined by demonstrating that the required sensitivity has
been obtained.
=========================================================
69. Welding inspection activities can be separated into three stages
corresponding to the welding work process. Inspectors should perform____
A) specific tasks prior to welding.
B) specific tasks prior to welding, during welding
C) specific tasks prior to welding, during welding and upon completion of
welding.
D) None of the above.
Answer: C. API 577, Welding Inspection [4.1]
=========================================================
70. What the thickness of material to use a technique may be used in which
the radiation passes through two walls and the weld (material)?
A) For all nominal outside diameter
B) For materials and for welds in components above 31⁄2 in. (89 mm) nominal
outside diameter
C) For materials and for welds in components 31⁄2 in. (89 mm) or less in
nominal outside diameter

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

D) None of the above
Answer: C. API 577, Radiographic Examination (RT) [[Link]]
=========================================================
71. If an imperfection / a discontinuity is found in weld and identified during
inspection and examination, it should be
A) size, characterized and evaluated.
B) subject to fitness for service.
c) removed with appropriate repair.
D) recorded in RBI documentation
Answer: A. Body knowledge
=========================================================
72. {An imperfection of a type or magnitude exceeding the acceptance criteria
is known as which of the following? }/{ what is term used to describe will
designates reject ability ?}
A) Discontinuity
B) Flaw
C) Defect
D) Indication
Answer: C. API 577, Defect [3.1.19]
=========================================================
73. Magnetic particle examination may be used to examine weldments in
which of the following?
a) Ferrous and non-ferrous materials
b) Ferrous materials exceeding 0.35 carbon content only
c) Ferromagnetic materials
d) Non-ferrous materials only
Answer: C. API 577, Magnetic Particle Examination (MT) [9.4.1]
=========================================================
74. Which of the following NDE methods is most likely to detect deep
subsurface flaws?
a) Ultrasonic UT
b) Magnetic Particle MT
c) Liquid Penetrant PT
d) Eddy Current EC
Answer: A. API 577, Ultrasonic Examination (UT) (MT) [9.9.1]

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

 7- API RP 571 2011
4.2.16 Mechanical Fatigue
1. Mechanical fatigue failures typically exhibit which type of surface feature?
A. Concentric rings or “beach marks”.
B. Horseshoes going upstream.
C. “Mud flat “type cracking.
D. “Rock candy “appearance.
Answer: A … API 571 … [Link] (a) Mechanical fatigue Appearance or
Morphology of Damage
Note: -
Fatigue cracking is a mechanical form of degradation that occurs when a
component is exposed to cyclical stresses for an extended period, often
resulting in sudden, unexpected failure.
The signature mark of a fatigue failure is a “clam shell” type fingerprint that
has concentric rings called “beach marks”.
=========================================================
2. Regarding the appearance or morphology of Mechanical Fatigue, the
signature mark of fatigue failure will typically appear as:
A. Single clam shell fingerprint with vertical straight lines directly below the
crack initiation site
B. Single clam shell fingerprint with rings called beach marks coming from a
crack initiation site
C. Concentric lines throughout the entire cross-sectional area
D. None of these are correct
Answer: B … API 571 … [Link] (a) Mechanical fatigue Appearance or
Morphology of Damage
=========================================================
3. Which of these is a predominant factor in mechanical fatigue cracking?
A. Operating equip past remaining life
B. Low-stress stamping
C. Impact toughness
D. Surface notches
Answer: D … API 571 … [Link] (a)(1) Mechanical fatigue Critical Factors
=========================================================
4. Which of these is the most affecting parameter in fatigue cracks?
A. Design and ratio Ultimate Tensile Strength (UTS) and the minimum stress.
B. Design of insulation system, insulation type, temperature and
environment.
C. dissolved gases, oxygen and carbon dioxide.
D. None of the above.
Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam
Answer: A … API 571 … [Link] (a) & (b)(2) Mechanical fatigue Critical
Factors 4.3.1 Galvanic Corrosion
5. Which of the following factors does NOT contribute to galvanic corrosion?
A. Service temp between 212°F – 250°F (100°C – 121°C)
B. Presence of an electrolyte
C. An anode and a cathode
D. An electrical connection
Answer: A … API 571, Par. [Link]. (a)(1)(2)(3) ……Galvanic Corrosion critical
factor 4.3.2 Atmospheric Corrosion
=========================================================
6. A form of corrosion that occurs from moisture associated with atmospheric
conditions is:
A. Brittle fracture
B. Caustic corrosion
C. Stress cracking
D. Atmospheric corrosion
Answer: D … API 571, Par. [Link] …… Atmospheric Corrosion Description of
Damage 4.3.3 Corrosion Under Insulation (CUI)
=========================================================
7. The rate of corrosion under insulation will usually not be increased by
insulation systems that:
A. Contain chloride salts
B. Do not utilize vapor barriers
C. Wick moisture
D. Are made of closed-cell foam glass
Answer: D … API 571, Par. [Link] (e)… Corrosion Under Insulation (CUI
Prevention / Mitigation
8. Insulating materials often “hold moisture” that creates corrosion. The
ability of insulation to draw and hold water or moisture is known as:
A. Wicking
B. Saturation
C. Wetting
D. None of these are correct
Answer: A … API 571, Par. [Link] (e)… Corrosion Under Insulation (CUI
Critical Factors
=========================================================
9. Which of the following damage can occur for 300 Series SS, specifically in
older calcium silicate insulation (known to contain chlorides)?
A. localized pitting and chloride stress corrosion cracking.
B. pitting and localized corrosion.

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

C. Uniform thinning.
D. High-temperature oxidation.
Answer: A … API 571, Par. [Link](c) …Corrosion Under Insulation (CUI
Appearance or Morphology of Damage
10. What is the normal temperature range specified by API-570 where an
insulated carbon steel piping system is susceptible to corrosion under
insulation?
A. Between 25°F and 150°F
B. Between 25°F and 250°F
C. Between 10°F and 350°F
D. Between 150°F and 400°F
Answer: C … API 571, Par. [Link] (a)(1) … Corrosion Under Insulation (CUI
Critical Factors
=========================================================
11. The most common form of corrosion under insulation on carbon steel
piping is:
A. Galvanic corrosion
B. General Corrosion
C. Stress corrosion cracking
D. localized pitting corrosion
Answer: D … API 571, Par. [Link] (a) … Corrosion Under Insulation (CUI)
Appearance or Morphology of Damage 4.3.5 Boiler Water Condensate
Corrosion
=========================================================
12. The most common manifestation of boiler water condensate corrosion is
A. Boiler tube ruptures.
B. Corrosion fatigue cracking of deaerators.
C. Pitting.
D. Smooth grooving of pipe walls.
Answer: C … API 571 … Para. [Link] (a) … Boiler Water Condensate Corrosion
Appearance or
Morphology of Damage
Note: -
General corrosion and pitting in the boiler system and condensate return
piping.
Corrosion from oxygen tends to be a pitting type damage.
Carbon dioxide corrosion tends to be a smooth grooving (Jagged fir-tree
pattern) of the pipe wall 4.3.10 Caustic Corrosion
=========================================================
13. Localized corrosion due to the concentration of caustic or alkaline salts is?
A. Erosion
Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam
B. Brittle fracture
C. Caustic corrosion
D. Phase failure
Answer: C … API 571 … Para. [Link] … Caustic Corrosion Description of
Damage 4.4.2 Sulfidation
14. In general, the corrosion resistance of iron and nickel alloys in sulfidation
atmospheres is dependent upon the content of:
A. Molybdenum
B. Chromium
C. Nickel
D. Niobium or titanium
Answer: B … API 571, Par. [Link].e Sulfidation Critical Factors
=========================================================
15. the type of corrosion caused by sulfidation is most often described as
A. Uniform thinning.
B. High-temperature oxidation.
C. Pitting or localized corrosion.
D. Stress corrosion cracking.
Answer: A… API 571, Par. [Link] (a) Sulfidation Appearance or Morphology
of Damage
=========================================================
16. Sulfidation of iron-based alloys usually begins at temperatures above:
A. 200°F (93°C)
B. 300°F (149°C)
C. 400°F (204°C)
D. 500°F (260°C)
Answer: D… API 571, Par. [Link] (c) Sulfidation Critical Factors
=========================================================
17. Proactive and retroactive positive material identification (useful PMI) for
materials exposed to:
A. Caustic embrittlement.
B. Ammonia stress corrosion cracking.
C. Sulfidation.
D. Sour water.
Answer: C… API 571, Par. [Link] (d) Sulfidation Inspection and Monitoring
4.5.1 Chloride Stress Corrosion Cracking (Cl-SCC)
=========================================================
18. Which inspection method is most appropriate for detecting external
chloride stress corrosion cracking in austenitic stainless-steel piping system?
A. Dry magnetic particle.

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

B. Liquid penetrant.
C. Longitudinal ultrasonic.
D. Radiography.
Answer: B … API 571 … Para. [Link] (b) … Chloride Stress Corrosion Cracking
(Cl-SCC) Inspection and Monitoring
Note: -
Cracking is surface connected and may be detected visually in some cases.
PT or phase analysis EC techniques are the preferred methods.
=========================================================
19. materials engineer is performing a failure analysis on an integral-finned
heat exchanger tube made os 300 series stainless steel. the tube is from a
reformer unit. The fins were cold-worked the cracking mode is noted to be
transgranular , branched cracking. Which of the following was most likely
responsible for the failures?
A. Chloride-induced Stress Corrosion Cracking.
B. Metal fatigue cracking.
C. Polythionic acid cracking.
D. Hydrogen- induced Cracking.
Answer: A … API 571 … Para. [Link] (C) … Chloride Stress Corrosion Cracking
(Cl-SCC) Appearance
or Morphology of Damage
=========================================================
20. Preferred methods of inspection for chloride-induced stress corrosion
cracking include:
A. Ultrasonic testing and visual testing.
B. Penetrant testing and eddy-current phase analysis.
C. Penetrant testing and radiographic testing.
D. Wet fluorescent magnetic particle testing and visual testing.
Answer: B … API 571 … Para. [Link] (b) … Chloride Stress Corrosion Cracking
(Cl-SCC) Inspection
and Monitoring
=========================================================
21. Chloride SCC of 300 Series SS generally occurs above a metal temperature
of:
A. 100°F (38°C)
B. 140°F (60°C)
C. 180°F (82°C)
D. 212°F (100°C)
Answer: B … API 571 … Para. [Link] (g) … Chloride Stress Corrosion Cracking
(Cl-SCC) Critical Factors

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam

=========================================================
22. Which is the most affected material to Chloride Stress Corrosion Cracking
(Cl-SCC)?
A. Nickel based alloys.
B. 300 Series SS.
C. Alloy 800 series.
D. Duplex stainless steel.
Answer: B… API 571, Para. [Link](c), CL SCC Affected Materials
4.5.3 Caustic Stress Corrosion Cracking (Caustic Embrittlement)
23. C.S in Caustic Service is working at temperature 140F against NAOH 30%.
What should you do in this Material?
A. Use it after making stress relieving (PWHT).
B. Use without stress relieving (PWHT).
C. C.S is not recommended in Caustic Service.
D. This area applicable and recommended to used nickel alloys.
Answer: A… API 571, Para. [Link] (b)/ Figure 4-146, Caustic Stress Corrosion
Cracking (Caustic Embrittlement) Critical Factors

Elite engineering services [Link] API 510 Exam